User Guide

Classifier Administration
Server
April 2022
 Copyright Terms and Conditions

Copyright HelpSystems, LLC and its group of companies.

The content in this document is protected by the Copyright Laws of the United States of America and other countries worldwide. The
unauthorized use and/or duplication of this material without express and written permission from HelpSystems is strictly prohibited.
Excerpts and links may be used, provided that full and clear credit is given to HelpSystems with appropriate and specific direction to the
original content. HelpSystems and its trademarks are properties of the HelpSystems group of companies. All other marks are property
of their respective owners.
202204121056
Table of Contents

About the Classifier Administration Server User Guide 9

About this guide 9
Common Label Handling Features 10
Propagating Labels 10
Printable Labels 10
Recognizable Received Label Values 11
Mandatory Selectors 11
Default Label Values 11
Insert Marking Label As Field Code (Word Only) 12
Document Properties (Office Classifier) 12
Message Properties (Email, OWA, Mail Add-in, Notes and Mobile) 13
Use Of Templates 14
Common Label Interface Actions 15
Label Selection Interfaces 15
Ribbon 15
Label Selection Dialog 17
Classifier Decision Tree 26
Label Options 31
Clear (Label Value) 31
Default 32
Link To Site Defined Help 32
Show Summary Marking 32
About Classifier 32
Folder View Labelling Operation 32
Manage Classifier Administration Settings 34
Configuring Folder Paths 34
Getting an Existing Configuration 34
Publishing the Configuration 35
Configuration Archives 36

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 3

Table of Contents

Permissions for Publishing to AD 37

Audit Non-Privileged Attempts to Publish Configuration 38
Estimating Configuration Size 39
Publishing a Test Configuration 40
Test Mode Administration 40
Locking/Unlocking Configuration 41
Creating a Web Configuration 41
Internet Information Services (IIS) 42
Applying Global Settings 43
Application Settings 43
Auditing 45
Classifier Actions and Events 45
Classifier Checks 46
Options 48
Privacy Settings 48
Languages 49
Algorithm for finding the text to display 50
License 52
License Filenames 53
License Codes 53
Installing a License 54
Restrictions 54
Viewing Client License Information 55
Image Library 56
Adding a new Image 56
Editing an Image 56
Deleting an Image 56
User Message Library 57
Use Of User Messages 57
Adding a New Message to the User Message Library 57
Viewing Message Language 58
Viewing Message Properties 58

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 4

 Table of Contents

Copying Messages 59
Deleting Message 59
User Interface Library 60
Pre-configured UI Elements 60
Adding a New UI Definition 62
Viewing and Changing Properties of a UI Definition 62
Copying a UI definition 63
Deleting a UI Definition 63
General message options 63
Labelling Configurations 66
Add a Label Configuration 66
Renaming a Label 67
Deleting a Label 67
Selector Library 67
Active, Obsolete, and Retained Selectors and Values 68
Label Dominance 69
Adding a Single Selection List 70
Adding a Multi-Selection List 71
Adding a Text Entry Selector 73
Adding a Date Picker Selector 74
Adding a Date Offset List Selector 75
Editing Selectors 76
Making Selectors Obsolete/Restoring Selectors 77
Deleting a Selector 78
Marking Library 78
Adding a New Marking Format 79
Copying a Marking Format 82
Deleting a Marking Format 82
Content Library 82
Matchers 83
Defining Expressions 83
Content Checking User View 87

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 5

Table of Contents

Condition Library 89
Add a New Condition 89
Editing Conditions 90
Copying Conditions 90
Deleting Conditions 90
Changing the Order of Condition Types 91
Supported Condition Types 91
List of Active Directory attributes supported by Active Directory Attribute Values of User 96
Data Classification Service Specific Conditions 96
Question Library 96
Adding a Question and Answer 97
Editing a Question and Answer 97
Deleting a Question and Answer 98
Copying a Question and Answer 98
Configuration Settings 98
Classifier Application Settings 99
General Settings 116
Label Locations 129
Combined Label Locations 132
Policies 134
Adding a New Policy 134
Defining Selectors and Values for Policies 138
Applying RMS Policy Notes 160
Azure RMS Support 160
Clearance Checks and Settings 166
Check Attachments/Recipients/Originator with Warn/Prevent parameters 166
Email Domain Clearance 167
Clearance Library 168
Dynamic Clearances 169
Clearance Checks When Sending Messages 170
Email, OWA, Mail Add-in, Notes and Mobile Differences 172
Differences in Enabling and Disabling 172

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 6

 Table of Contents

OWA Classifier and Classifier Mail Add-in vs Email Classifier 172

Notes Classifier vs Email Classifier 173
Mobile Classifier vs Email Classifier 174
Deploying Configuration 175
Creating and Modifying the Configuration 175
Retrieving the Master Configuration 176
Classifier Registry Entry Grouping 176
Configuration Registry Search Algorithm 177
Client Registry Locations 177
Classifier Service Registry Locations 178
Exchange Classifier Registry Locations 179
Classifier Administration Registry Locations 179
Registry Key Requirements 179
Environmental Requirements 179
Required Registry Entries to Configure Classifier (Minimum Set) 181
Active Directory 181
File Store 182
Web Server 182
Additional Considerations 184
Setting the Registry Keys Directly 184
Adding Classifier Registry Keys 185
Setting the Registry Keys using Group Policy 186
Applying Supplied ADM/ADMX/ADML Files 187
Registry Keys Set By Group Policy 189
Label Configuration Registry Settings 189
Registry Settings 189
Service Mode Registry Settings 193
Web Host Settings 194
Client Configuration Registry Settings 196
Settings To Auto Enable Microsoft Office Header / Footer Controls 199
File Classifier Registry Settings 202
Extending the Active Directory Schema 205

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 7

Table of Contents

Deploying Software 206

Desktop Clients 206
Classifier Administration 206
Classifier Clearance Service 206
Label Propagation Mechanisms 207
Supported File Extensions and Label Locations 209
Application Operation 210
General Limitations 213
Plugins 214
Example of Best Matching Rule 216
BJTrace Logging Facility 220
Auditing Event Messages 221
Supported Content Checking File Types 238
Mapping Address Book to AD Attribute 240

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 8

 About the Classifier Administration Server User Guide / About this guide

About the Classifier Administration

Server User Guide
Classifier Administration lets administrators:
l establish a Classifier configuration for the first time
l administer an existing local configuration
l set/view Classifier administration (audit control) properties
l retrieve an existing master configuration to your local File Store
l publish the current configuration
l publish a test configuration. See the Administration Server Getting Started Guide for more
information.
l lock / unlock the configuration
l generate configuration information suitable for retrieval from a URL
l define and publish the Classifier Configuration, including the Policies based on that
Configuration, to groups of users
l define SMTP domain clearances
If you are new to Classifier, we recommend that you read the Administration Server Getting
Started Guide before you start to understand system requirements.
NOTE: The Classifier Administration's target environment assumes screen resolutions
of 1280 * 800 or better. The application can run at smaller resolutions, but some issues
may be encountered, particularly using minimal screen sizes. For example, running
Classifier Administration in Windows Safe Mode can result in a screen resolution of
640 x 480. The interface will be mostly usable, but some buttons at the bottom of some
dialogs can be hidden behind the taskbar (Windows 7). You may need to auto hide the
taskbar.

About this guide

This guide provides a reference for Administrators planning to use Classifier Administration.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 9

 Common Label Handling Features / Propagating Labels

Common Label Handling Features

This section describes the Label handling features that are common to the various applications
(Email Classifier, Office Classifier, OWA, Notes and Mobile Classifier), and usually available if a
Classifier product (Microsoft Excel, PowerPoint, Project, Visio, Word, Outlook, OWA, Mail Add-in,
Mobile or Lotus Notes) is installed and enabled.

Propagating Labels
Classifier product architecture defines how products will operate to ensure that label information
applied under one Classifier application can be recognised and processed by another Classifier
application, or a suitable third party application.
Office Classifier stores label information in the properties of a document allowing other Classifier
applications to process the object according to the rules defined by the site.
Email Classifier, OWA, Notes and Mobile Classifier store label information in custom properties of
a message allowing other Classifier applications to process the object according to the rules
defined by the site.
Label Propagation includes the following configurable features:
l Use label values in templates as the initial label values for any derived item
l Recognise and use label values from a received message as the initial label value for any
reply or forward of that received message.
l The ability in Email, OWA, and Notes Classifier to ensure that the label associated with the
email message dominates all labels associated with any Classifier labelled attachments
(documents or messages; or for emails only, Portion Mark).
NOTE: Fore more information of how a Classifier application handles label values
assigned by another Classifier application, see Label Propagation Mechanisms on
page 207.

Printable Labels
Office Classifier allows label values to be stored as markings in a variety of document locations
that will appear when printed including:
l Header
l Footer
l Watermark (Word only)
l Field codes (Word only)
l Portion Mark (Word, PowerPoint and Excel)
Email, OWA, Mail Add-in, Notes and Mobile Classifier allow markings to be assigned to content
and/or properties that are normally included in printed material:

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 10

 Common Label Handling Features / Recognizable Received Label Values

l FLOT
l LLOT
l Start and/or end of Subject
l Portion Mark
NOTE: Printing uses standard Outlook / OWA / Notes mechanisms. Therefore, if the
only label value on an email message is an X-Header, then any hard copy of the email
message will be unlabelled.

Recognizable Received Label Values

If, when an existing document is opened, Office Classifier cannot find the 'Classifier label' in the
expected property, it checks the document for any recognizable label values in the defined Label
Locations (for example, Document properties).
If, when an email or web email message is received, Email/ OWA / Mail Add-in / Notes Classifier
cannot find the Classifier label in the expected custom property, it will then check the message for
any recognisable label values in the defined label locations (for example, X-Header, FLOT, and
Subject).
If more than one label location is found containing a recognisable label value, then the
configurable relative precedence defined through Label Locations is used to determine the value
to use. The most significant value is then used as the document or message label value.

NOTE: For more information details of how a Classifier application handles label values
assigned by another Classifier application, see Label Propagation Mechanisms on page 207.
This appendix also covers files labelled by File or Power Classifier products.

Mandatory Selectors
Each Selector may be designated as Mandatory through application specific rules. See Policies
on page 134.
Mandatory selectors are indicated on the label selection interface by an asterisk ( * ). The asterisk
can be hidden.

Default Label Values

Whenever a new document or email is created, Classifier must determine the initial value of the
label.
This initial value will be blank for each label selector unless the Classifier policy specifies a default
value for that selector. Then the default value will appear as the initial value.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 11

 Common Label Handling Features / Insert Marking Label As Field Code (Word Only)

Insert Marking Label As Field Code (Word

Only)
NOTE: If a Word document is opened via an Office Web App, all field codes are displayed as
[Field] rather than the actual value when viewing in Microsoft Word.

A label value can be inserted as a field code in a Word document. It will use the Summary Marking
format. The feature is enabled/disabled using the Show 'Insert label' context menu setting.
This feature is designed for Administrators to create template documents with rich headers and
footers containing document label information.
To insert a field code:
1. Select a Label Value for the document using the label drop down selectors.
2. Navigate to where the field code should be inserted.
3. On the context menu (right mouse button), click Insert Label. The label value is placed at
the location of the cursor as a field code value.

Document Properties (Office Classifier)

NOTE: This feature is only applicable to Office Classifier.

In Excel, PowerPoint, Project or Word, when a label has been selected, a number of properties
relating to the Classifier label are stored in Document properties.

NOTE:
Visio does not support Custom Properties, and the Classifier Label value is held using a
different mechanism.
If you save a document as another type, the Classifier label information can be lost.
You can populate various standard document properties (Title, Author, Subject and
Keywords) that will be propagated if you save an Office document as PDF. However, Office
applications do NOT propagate any custom properties to the PDF, for example, the
bjDocumentSecurityLabel. Email, OWA and Notes Classifier will check defined label
locations for recognizable labels in standard PDF file properties for the Check for the high-
water mark and Add an attachment list rules.

The properties can be viewed using standard Office application actions.

For Office Excel, PowerPoint and Word 2010:
1. Click the Office button, then choose Prepare and Properties.
2. On the task pane, click Document Properties > Advanced Properties.
3. Select the Custom tab.
For Project 2010 or 2013:

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 12

 Common Label Handling Features / Message Properties (Email, OWA, Mail Add-in, Notes and Mobile)

1. Select File / Info and then choose Project Information / Advanced Properties .
2. Select the Custom tab.
For other Office 2013 applications along with Office 2016, 2019 and 365:
1. Select File / Info and then choose Properties .
2. Select the Custom Tab.
The private document properties maintained by Classifier are listed below. These properties
should not be modified by users or administrators:

Property Name Description

bjDocumentSecurityLabel The combined markings. Format is controlled by the
Custom format for
Label Summary custom document property
bjDocumentLabelXML XML format of the document Label.
bjDocumentLabelXML-0 Internal XML identifier
docIndexRef Unique document identifier.
bjFooterBothDocProperty Only if a Footer rule has been applied
bjHeaderBothDocProperty Only if a Header rule has been applied

Message Properties (Email, OWA, Mail

Add-in, Notes and Mobile)
NOTE: This is only applicable to Email, OWA, Mail Add-in, Notes and Mobile Classifier.

When a message is saved or sent, any label value selected is stored in a custom property. Any
markings defined by applicable rules are stored in the relevant locations. The values stored may
be readily visible if they are in a visible location (for example, Subject), but others are not readily
visible (for example, x-headers).
The private properties maintained by the various Classifier mail applications should not be
modified by users or administrators, but are documented here for information purposes:

Property Name Description

(x-)bjprotectivemarking The Classifier encoded (SISL) label.
docIndexRef Unique document identifier (used for audit trail purposes).

NOTE: To cause the x-bjprotectivemarking to be transmitted across an SMTP connection in a

Lotus environment, bjprotectivemarking must be included in the Domino server list of x-
headers (the "x-" is automatically applied by Domino).

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 13

 Common Label Handling Features / Use Of Templates

Use Of Templates
NOTE: This feature is not supported by OWA Classifier, Mail Add-in, Mobile or Notes
Classifier.

The Office applications allow you to create template files that can be used as the basis for new
documents.
You can set Classifier label values on these templates. When you subsequently create a new file
using a labelled template, Classifier uses the template label as the initial label value, rather than
using any default label setting.
If the template has no Classifier label value set, then the configured default label value (if any) will
be used.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 14

 Common Label Interface Actions / Label Selection Interfaces

Common Label Interface Actions

Label Selection Interfaces
Classifier applications allow the user to select labels from Selectors and Values from the Ribbon.
The Selectors, Selector Values, and associated options are defined in the Classifier policy
configured for the current user. See Policies on page 134.
If the Ribbon is not available, the user can select a label value in the Label Selection dialog.
If Masking of Selectors against Clearance is enabled, then the list of values presented for each
Selector will be restricted by the user's clearance.
These basic label selection mechanisms may be extended by use of Portion Mark, Favourites,
Recently Used Labels and Portion Marks, Single Click operation, Assisted Labelling operation
and the definition of Tabs in a Policy. You can enable Display selector values as buttons for single
selection list selectors within the policy.

Ribbon
You can enable/disable and set how various Ribbon settings are displayed.
To configure your Ribbon:
1. Select Labelling Configurations > Configuration Settings > General Settings.
2. To set how the ribbon is displayed, select a mode from Classifier ribbon layout mode.
3. To set where the Classifier label item will be within the ribbon, select an option from
Classifier ribbon group location.
4. If you want to remove Classifier options from the ribbon, enable the Remove Classifier
options from the ribbon bar.

NOTE:
In some circumstances (for example, Office 2013) the ribbon will not appear when a read only
document is opened until you choose Edit. For Outlook, you can use the Show Classifier on
ribbon when reading to hide the Classifier Ribbon entry when reading a message.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 15

 Common Label Interface Actions / Label Selection Interfaces

The dialog above shows the first (Single selection list) selector with Show value as set to Colour
and text and Display selector values as buttons option enabled, the second selector has the
option disabled, and that selector appears as a drop down selection list. Items are displayed in
columns and that the width of the 'column' is governed by the widest element.
The selector captions (Classification and Department) appear in the ribbon. To display these
selector captions:
1. Select Labelling Configurations > <configuration name> Policies > <policy name>.
2. From the Actions pane, select Properties.
3. Select Show selector captions on the ribbon.
The Favourites button in the example above will only appear if Display of Favourites button is
enabled. Favourites are not supported under OWA Classifier or the Mail Add-in.
The Portion Mark button shown in the example above will only appear if the option is enabled for
the current application. Portion Mark is not supported under OWA Classifier or Notes Classifier.
The Office ribbon limits the number of items that can be placed inside a group on the ribbon. If a
single/multi selector contains many values and is configured to be shown as buttons (or
checkboxes in the case of multi-select selectors), then Classifier may not display the items on the
ribbon. Instead the selector will need to be set via the label dialog. The limits are:
l If the policy contains at least one selector to be displayed as a button on the ribbon and no
selectors that are to be displayed as checkboxes on the ribbon, then Classifier can display
up to 150 items in the ribbon for the selector(s).
l If the policy contains at least one selector that is to be displayed as checkboxes on the
ribbon and no selectors that are to be displayed as buttons on the ribbon, then Classifier
can display up to 150 items in the ribbon for the selector(s).
l If the policy contains at least one selector that is to be displayed as buttons on the ribbon
and at least one selector that is to be displayed as checkboxes on the ribbon, then we allow
up to 100 items to be displayed

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 16

 Common Label Interface Actions / Label Selection Interfaces

Label Selection Dialog

In some situations, the user will need to choose a label when the ribbon is unavailable. For
example, if a check mandatory selectors rule detects that a mandatory selector has no value
chosen.
In such situations, Classifier applications show the Classifier Label Selection dialog which will
show the selectors and values pertinent to the current user. This dialog is also used to choose
values for selectors that cannot be displayed in the ribbon; for example, more than three selectors
or multiple selection list selectors.
The dialog below shows the first (Single selection list) selector with Display selector values as
buttons option enabled. The second (Single selection list) selector has the option disabled and
that selector appears as a drop down selection list. Refer to Labelling Configurations on page 66
for more information.

NOTE: The example above displays the standard operation. This is modified if you make use
of the Favourites, Recently Used Labels and Portion Marks, Single Click operation, or
Assisted Labelling operation or Tabs features. The presentation is slightly different under
OWA.

OWA
In an OWA environment, label selection and the standard label actions appear on an extended
message compose form.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 17

 Common Label Interface Actions / Label Selection Interfaces

Mail Add-in
In a Mail add-In environment, label selection and the standard label actions appear on an
extended message compose form.

The Classifier label interface is invoked using the Classifier button . The example below does
NOT have single click enabled.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 18

 Common Label Interface Actions / Label Selection Interfaces

NOTE: In a Notes environment, the current label setting is displayed, but the label value is set
via the configured Classifier label dialog if the Classify button is clicked.

Favourites
NOTE: This feature is not supported by OWA Classifier. Classifier Mail Add-in, Notes 8 and
Mobile Classifier.

You can use the Favourite Labels feature to remember their favourite label values (on that
workstation), and to choose the label value directly rather than choosing each selector value in
turn.
If applicable, the date/time stamp is updated to the current date/time every time you use the
Favourite.
To display Favourites:

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 19

 Common Label Interface Actions / Label Selection Interfaces

1. Select Labelling Configurations > Configuration Settings > General Settings.

2. Enable Display of Favourites button.
If the Recently Used feature is also enabled (when you configure your Policy), then the Favourites
menu of actions will appear as:

NOTE: The Favourites and recently used values that appear in the menus are initially shown
using the marking format associated with the Custom format for Summary Markings.

You can:
l add current label to favourites
l organise and rename Favourites
l set current label as default rather than using any policy defined default. Default
Classification must be enabled. See Policies on page 134.
l select a Favourite label from the sub-list (e.g. Public Sales) - the label value then appears in
the main label selection display.
l Select a Recent label

Portion Mark
NOTE: This feature is not available under OWA Classifier, Notes Classifier, or Mobile
Classifier, and is not applicable to Visio and Project.

A Portion Mark is an abbreviated marking derived from a label value. For example, [P] for Public.
Availability of the feature is controlled by application specific options. If the Portion Marking
setting is enabled and has a valid Marking Format configured, then Portion Mark appears in the
Classifier label ribbon.

If the Recently Used Labels and Portion Marks feature is enabled, then the recently used portion
mark (label values) will appear as a sub-list.
You can:

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 20

 Common Label Interface Actions / Label Selection Interfaces

l select a Recent Portion Mark from the sub-list.

l choose Portion Mark allowing the user to select a specific label, or choose a favourite label,
or a recent portion mark subject to their availability:

Favourites will only appear if there are favourites stored.

Recently used values will only appear if the Display of Favourites button is Enabled . The number
of recently used portion marks that are remembered is governed by the Maximum number of
labels to show setting.

Recently Used Labels And Portion Marks

NOTE:
This feature is not available under OWA Classifier.
The feature is unavailable unless Display of Favourites button is Enabled, as this is how
recently used labels are accessed.
Recently used labels are displayed using the Custom format for Summary Markings. These
features are only enabled if Maximum number of labels to show is set greater than zero.

The Recently Used Portion Marks is only relevant if Portion Marking is enabled in the application.
Label values are only added to the list of 'Recently used labels' when a message is submitted or a
document is saved. The selection of a label value does NOT update the list.
Recently used labels are available to the user under Favourites.

Single Click Operation

NOTE: This mode of operation is only available if the current policy has Use Single Click with
pre-defined labels configured.

The administrator can use the Use Single Click with pre-defined labels feature to configure up to
twelve separate buttons, each with its own Label value, Caption, Tooltip, Colour, or Image that

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 21

 Common Label Interface Actions / Label Selection Interfaces

replace the standard drop downs in the Classifier Label Ribbon. Single Click can be used in
conjunction with Assisted Labelling .

NOTE: The appearance will be modified according to whether other features such as
Favourites or Recently Used Labels and Portion Marks are in use. The matrix of single click
buttons displayed is affected by a windows re-size operation, so short captions are advisable.

The user sees the buttons configured, and selects the associated label by clicking the appropriate
button (Pub / Sales or Conf / Board in the Outlook example below, or Non-Business etc. in the
OWA example).

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 22

 Common Label Interface Actions / Label Selection Interfaces

The user can select individual Selector values by clicking the Classifier label dialog box launcher
in Outlook, the Select Label button in OWA, to launch the Label Selection dialog.

NOTE: In Outlook, the dialog box launcher can be replaced by a button by enabling the
Display of Label Dialog launch button setting.

If single click is in use and the the user must select a Classification from the label selection dialog,
then an intermediate dialog may appear allowing a Single Click button to be clicked, or the full
label selection dialog to be invoked by clicking the 'Current Marking' button ( No Marking in the
example below).

The Continue button allows you to proceed without selecting a label value. The dialog above is
changed slightly if Display of Label Dialog launch button is Enabled.

Assisted Labelling Operation

NOTE: These features are not supported by Mobile Classifier.

Assisted Labelling can be configured to guide user selection of label values by limiting the
choices of selectors and/or selector values depending upon the value chosen for a preceding
selector.
The following shows a simple example of the user operation where selecting a value for the
category selector in the ribbon adds a second selector (Annotation) with the values of Annotation
being tailored according to the choice of Category.

Office Classifier
Initially the Classifier label shows only the category selector with no default value.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 23

 Common Label Interface Actions / Label Selection Interfaces

The presentation may vary if favourites or portion mark are configured to be available.
If Display selector values as buttons is enabled, this dialog might appear as:

Selecting Cat 3 will add the Annotation selector to the display and present the configured
Annotation values.

If there are more than three selectors or selector types that cannot be shown in the ribbon, then
the label selection button may appear as per the examples below depending upon space
utilisation within the window:

Label Selection Dialog - Assisted Labelling

The Label Selection dialog may sometimes appear when assisted labelling is in use. The
configured selectors and values appear / are hidden in a similar manner to the ribbon operation.
In the following example, the Fourth selector appears, but would be hidden if a different value
were selected for the Third selector .

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 24

 Common Label Interface Actions / Label Selection Interfaces

The dialog will be populated with appropriate defaults.

Initially only the first selector is shown (in this example Classification):

Selecting a value extends the label selection according to the configuration. In the example
below, selecting General Business has made Annotation available for selection.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 25

 Common Label Interface Actions / Label Selection Interfaces

Notes Classifier
Notes Classifier operates only in response to the Classify button, (there is no ribbon equivalent),
and for assisted labelling operations, the Label selection dialog is always presented showing the
relevant configured values for each selector.

Classifier Decision Tree

The Decision Tree is an alternative way for the user to generate a label for an email or a
document.
It aims to reduce the need for the user to know details of what actual label to pick, and instead
presents a series of questions for them to describe the work that they are doing. For example, it ’ s
a personal email, it ’ s related to a proof of concept, research and development, a purchase
request for a new toaster, etc. By answering the questions posed a user is guided to select the
most appropriate label.
The Decision Tree is displayed in its own dialog on the client, invoked by the user selecting a
ribbon button or from within the Classifier Label Selection dialog. It is independent of the other
means of selecting a label. All methods; Single-Click, Label Dialog, Decision Tree can be
configured to be available in a policy concurrently.
This is an example configuration. The user is asked to select the department that will own the
document and what type of data the document contains. If a user chooses a particular answer,
then a label can be set.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 26

 Common Label Interface Actions / Label Selection Interfaces

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 27

 Common Label Interface Actions / Label Selection Interfaces

Configuring the Decision Tree

An Administrator can use the decision tree as an alternate way to generate a label for an email or
document. It presents a series of questions such that a user can describe the work they are doing
allowing them to be guided to select the most appropriate label.
A user interface area for the Decision Tree dialog allows customisation of the dialog that appears
on the client. See the User Interface Library on page 60.
The Question Library (QL) contains questions and pre-defined answers for each question. It
enables the reuse of questions between policies and groups potential answers together. This is is
located together with the other libraries outside of and available to the policies. It will contain a
collection of independent questions, each having a number of associated answers. Question
Library changes are monitored and updated where they are used in the Decision Tree Editors (all
policies). For more detailed information, see the Question Library.
A different Decision Tree may be configured for each policy. The Decision Tree Editor operates in
a similar way to the Assisted Labelling Editor, and when enabled, appears on a new Decision
Tree tab in the admin tool.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 28

 Common Label Interface Actions / Label Selection Interfaces

Renaming selectors and selector values will be applied to any in use in the Decision Tree.
Therefore, renaming then switching back to the Decision Tree will show the new names in the
configured labels.
Changing selectors in the policy (unless prevented by the ‘in use’ check) will be reflected in the
label dialog in the Decision Tree editor. That is, the currently available selectors and values,
together with colours and captions, will be shown when the Add Label dialog (or its corresponding
Properties instance) is next opened.

Decision Tree in the Client

The Decision Tree dialog in the client is launched by a Ribbon button. This button is available
when composing emails and when editing documents. The Decision Tree dialog may also be
invoked from the Label Selection dialog.

NOTE: The Decision Tree in the client feature will not be available for Sent Item email
messages. The following images show examples of how the Decision Tree Dialog may
appear in the Client.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 29

 Common Label Interface Actions / Label Selection Interfaces

Decision Tree Option in Outlook

NOTE: Note: Check that the Decision Tree has been enabled in the Classifier Administration
User Interface.

To see the Decision Tree Feature in Outlook:

1. In the Message menu, select the Use Guidance icon. A Classification Guidance
window will appear.
2. The description will ask, What kind of message is it? Select an option in the list. Once the
option is selected a label will appear.
3. Click the OK button. The resulting label will be applied to the email.

Mobile Classifier User Interface

Mobile Classifier is an email App that can be installed on a supported mobile device. The App will
appear as an entry in the App list either as an icon, or as an icon with associated text:

When viewing messages in a folder, the classification value (if any) appears as follows:

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 30

 Common Label Interface Actions / Label Options

When composing a message the classification value is shown as a summary marking:

Clicking the classification value displays the single click selection list:

Label Options
Email, Office and OWA Classifier present the standard label options menu.
There are some differences between Outlook and OWA as per the examples in Ribbon examples
.
This operation can be modified under Office Classifier using the Remove Classifier options from
the ribbon.

Clear (Label Value)

NOTE: For Notes Classifier this only appears on the label selection dialog. Not available under
Mobile Classifier. This action clears the current values for each selector.

You can control whether this option appears using the Show labeller 'Clear' button setting.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 31

 Common Label Interface Actions / Folder View Labelling Operation

Default
NOTE: For Notes Classifier this only appears on the label selection dialog. Not applicable
under Mobile Classifier. This action restores the label value to the default label values defined
by the policy.

You can control whether this option appears using the Show labeller 'Default' button setting.

Link To Site Defined Help

NOTE: Not supported by Mail Add-in or Mobile Classifier. Only appears on the Label selection
dialog for Notes Classifier. Whilst OWA Classifier supports the Help links defined in a
Classifier Configuration, the nature of OWA access may mean that a defined link is not
accessible due to external access controls (e.g. additional authentication requirements).
Classifier Mail Add-in does not support this feature.

This action will open the link configured in URL for your labelling help site. This action will be
unavailable (greyed) if the setting is not configured.

Show Summary Marking

NOTE: This is only applicable to Office Classifier. OWA Classifier and Mail Add-in Classifier do
not allow the user to close the Summary Marking area.

This action allows the user to re-instate the Summary Marking area. The action will only appear if
the following are all true:
l Show Summary Marking in task pane is Enabled
l Force Summary Marking in task pane is Disabled (Enabled means the summary marking
area cannot be closed).
l The user has closed the summary marking area that normally appears at the bottom of the
application window, AND the current environment does not provide another means of
restoring the summary marking area (e.g. Outlook provides an expand option after closure).

About Classifier
NOTE: Not available under Notes Classifier, Classifier Mail Add-in, nor Mobile Classifier.

Selecting About Classifier shows information about the installed Email or Office Classifier product
including the license state for that client, and configuration location etc.

Folder View Labelling Operation

NOTE: This feature is only applicable to Email Classifier (Outlook) and OWA Classifier.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 32

 Common Label Interface Actions / Folder View Labelling Operation

If the Allow Folder View labelling is Enabled , the user has access to:
l A Label selected message(s) button when viewing a folder summary in Outlook (not
available under OWA)
l A Set Label... button when viewing an open message.
The ribbon may include an additional action (Show Label in the above) because there are either
selectors not visible on the ribbon (e.g. insufficient space, text selectors etc.) or assisted labelling
is in operation. Show label will show the current settings.
To label one or more messages in a folder:
1. Select the required messages and click Label selected message(s) . To change the label
on a message that is open, click Set Label.
In either case, the usual label selection dialog (Single Click if enabled) will appear allowing
choice of the label to be applied to the messages. The dialog will show the existing label of
the messages except if at least one message has a different label in which case the label
values are blank.
2. Select the required selector values and click OK to apply the change.
3. If you label a message AND a label change rule is triggered, then a standard policy check
dialog appears. If you use Label selected messages with multiple messages selected AND
more than one message triggers a label change rule, then a dialog appears enabling user
to select a message and then click Label selected message.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 33

 Manage Classifier Administration Settings / Configuring Folder Paths

Manage Classifier Administration

Settings
Configure Classifier Administration Settings to set up roles, permissions, and folder paths for your
Configurations.

Configuring Folder Paths

You can set the folder paths to store the test, published, and web configuration.
To set the folder paths:

1. Select > Configuration Folder Paths.

2. Enter the locations for the following:
l Get Configuration - where a copy of your existing configuration is stored on your local

machine
l Publish Configuration - where your published configuration is stored to deploy to your

users
l Create Web Configuration - where a copy of your configuration is stored in a web-

supported format
l Test Mode - where a copy of your Test configuration is stored

Getting an Existing Configuration

If you want to make changes to your existing configuration . You retrieve a local copy, make the
required changes then (re-)publish the configuration to the master location. Further details of how
this fits into the overall process can be found in Deploying Configuration on page 175.

NOTE: This can only be performed by a Full Administrator role.

1. Select Classifier Administration and select Get Server Configuration .

2. Click Yes to ensure you want to get a server configuration. Doing so will overwrite any
existing local configuration.
3. Select the Active Directory or File Store option as required. Click Yes.
If you choose File Store, the Configuration is retrieved from the location defined by the
following registry setting:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Boldon James\Boldon James Classifier
Management WCF Service\ConfigImportFolder. By default this points to
c:\ProgramData\Boldon James\Config Import Folder.
4. Acknowledge the retrieval complete dialog.
NOTE: Getting the server configuration has no effect on any local Configuration
Archives.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 34

 Manage Classifier Administration Settings / Publishing the Configuration

Publishing the Configuration

NOTE: If the action is unavailable, it may be because a policy is locked.

Once your configuration is stable you need to publish it to make it available to the wider
community using either Active Directory or the file system. For an overview of these mechanisms,
see Deploying Configuration on page 175.
Every time you publish a configuration, an archive copy is stored locally as described in
Configuration Archives. The configuration space requirements are outlined in Estimating
Configuration Size on page 39.

NOTE: If you wish to publish the Classifier configuration via Active Directory then the Active
Directory Schema must be updated (see Extending the Active Directory Schema on page
205). A schema update is not required if you intend to publish the configuration via file store.

Publishing a configuration replaces any version previously stored in that location. To publish a
configuration:
1. Select the Classifier Administration node and choose Publish Configuration.
2. Select the Active Directory or File Store option as required.
If you choose File Store , the configuration is retrieved from the following registry setting:
HKEY_LOCAL_ MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Boldon James\Boldon James Classifier
Management WCF Service\ConfigPublishFolder.By default this points to
c:ProgramData\Boldon James\Config Publish Folder.
3. Enter a Publish reason and click OK. The OK button is disabled until you enter a Publish
Reason . The text entered will appear in the event log entry that records the publication.
4. NOTE: You may receive an error if the Single Click is enabled but does not contain
button definitions, and if no connected selectors are configured in Connect Selectors -
Assisted Labelling.

5. Click OK.
NOTE: Each time you publish a configuration, an archive copy is stored locally. See
Configuration Archives on page 36 for full details.

6. Click OK on the confirmation dialog.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 35

 Manage Classifier Administration Settings / Publishing the Configuration

NOTE:
l Publishing to Active Directory requires particular permissions that may not be available
by default to Domain Administrators on systems other than the Domain Controller. See
Permissions for Publishing to AD on page 37 for details of the permissions required.
l If you publish the configuration to file store you must ensure that the target (master)
location has suitable permissions. End users should have the ability to read from that
location and administrators that are to modify the master configuration must also have
the ability to write to that location using the network path.
l Changes made to the Classifier configuration must be published to ensure that
Classifier environments access the updated information.
l OWA Classifier only changes its configuration after a restart. Thus after publishing an
updated configuration, an IISRESET would be required to cause OWA Classifier to use
that new configuration.
l SharePoint Classifier only picks up changes to the configuration after a restart or
recycle of the website where SharePoint Classifier WCF service is installed. This is
done through Internet Information Services or on the command line through the
Microsoft provided tool.
l Email and Office Classifier only pick up updated configuration on application restart. It
is advisable to restart all applications (Outlook, Word, Excel etc.) to avoid applications
using different versions of the configuration.
l Users of File Classifier must Logoff/logon to pick up changes to the published
configuration. This is because explorer.exe stays running in the background (using the
Classifier configuration available at the start) even if the user closes the Explorer
window.

Configuration Archives
NOTE: The files in a configuration should NOT be edited manually - the configuration is
signed, and almost any change invalidates the configuration.

Archives are stored in a separate folder structure:(C:\ProgramData\Boldon

James\CustomConfigurationArchives).
Each time you publish a configuration, a copy of the configuration being published is stored in a
new folder below CustomConfigurationArchives. The folder names start at zero and are
incremented by one each time.
The example below shows an archive structure of four archives (0 to 2):

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 36

 Manage Classifier Administration Settings / Publishing the Configuration

The archive copies mean that it is possible to manually roll back to an earlier configuration as
follows:
1. Choose the archive to which you wish to revert.
2. The contents of description.txt (...ConfigurationArchives\n\Label Configurations\<Classifier
test>\description.txt) can be checked for the publish reason associated with that archive -
the publish reason supplied appears at the end of each entry made to the file.
3. Delete the current contents of the ConfigImportFolder Configuration folder (Label
Configurations, Management and Messages).
4. Copy the same folders (Label Configurations, Management and Messages) from below the
relevant archive and into the configuration folder.
5. Get Server Configuration.
6. Check that the restored configuration is the one you want.
NOTE: Housekeeping and backup of these archive folders is a matter for the user.

Permissions for Publishing to AD

Publishing the configuration to Active Directory requires the ability to delete (and re-create)
relevant objects below the cn=Boldon James node. These permissions are not assigned by
default to Domain Administrators.
The following sequence shows you how to check / assign the relevant permissions:
1. Logon as a user that has Enterprise Administrator capabilities.
2. Run ADSIedit .
3. Choose Connect to ... and select Configuration from Select a well-known Naming Context .

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 37

 Manage Classifier Administration Settings / Publishing the Configuration

4. Expand the Configuration and right-click CN=Services/CN=Boldon James node.

5. Select Properties, then click the Security tab.
6. Select an existing <Group or user> (or add a new entry if required).
7. Click Advanced .
8. Select the relevant <entry> from the list. Click Edit .
9. Ensure all permissions are allowed except for Full control and Modify permissions.
IMPORTANT: Apply to: must be set to This object and all child objects .

10. Click OK and then ensure Include inheritable permissions from this object's parent is
checked on the previous dialog.
11. Click OK on subsequent dialogs to complete the sequence.

Audit Non-Privileged Attempts to Publish

Configuration
You can get Active Directory to report attempts by a non-privileged user to publish a Classifier
configuration to AD.

For Group Policy Management Editor MMC snap-in

users
1. Select Computer Configuration > Policies > Windows Settings> Security Settings > Local
Policies > Audit Policy.
2. Select Audit directory service access and edit the properties.
3. From the Security Setting tab, select both Success and Failure. Click OK.
4. Select Audit object access and edit the properties.
5. From the Security Setting tab, select both Success and Failure. Click OK.

For ADSIEdit users

1. Navigate to Configuration > CN=Configuration,DC=classifier,DC=test > CN=Services >
CN=Boldon James.
2. Right-click the node and choose Properties .
3. Select the Security Tab and click Advanced .
4. Select the Auditing tab and click Add.
5. Enter Everyone and click OK.
6. In the Auditing Entry for Boldon James presented for Everyone, select Success and Failure
for each of the following:
l Delete

l Delete Subtree

l Modify permissions

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 38

 Manage Classifier Administration Settings / Publishing the Configuration

l Modify Owner
l All validated writes
l Create all child objects
l Delete all child objects
l Create account objects
l Delete account objects

Estimating Configuration Size

The Classifier configuration comprises a set of folders and files that are published.
Publication to file store is a copy process and the size is easily determined (e.g. the structure
below: C:\|Users\<username>\Appdata\Roaming\Boldon James\ConfigurationNote: These
folders may be hidden:

Publication to Active Directory maps each folder and file to an individual object in Active Directory,
and requires base-64 encoding for image files. This encapsulation process incurs an overhead.
The impact on the Active Directory (the NTDS.dit file typically found in the Windows\ntds folder)
can be estimated using the following:

Component Impact on Active Directory (Kb)

Configuration content Configuration size in file store
Overhead estimate per object in AD The number of folders plus the number of files in
(1.1 Kb per item). the configuration *1.1.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 39

 Manage Classifier Administration Settings / Publishing a Test Configuration

Overheads for base-64 encoding of The size of image files *33.

image files.
Total Sum of the above

A typical Classifier configuration contains about 15 folders and 16 files; plus 1 folder and 7 files
per policy; plus however many image files are added. With no image files and a single policy the
configuration within Active Directory would typically be less than 300 Kb.

Publishing a Test Configuration

NOTE: This action is not applicable to server based Classifier applications (e.g. OWA
Classifier) as it is designed to operate in conjunction with Test Mode Administration which
operates in a local desktop environment.

Once you have completed configuration of a policy (including the Label UI and Rules) you should
check that the policy produces the desired effect for the end user. The Publish Test Configuration
action facilitates this without disturbing the deployed configuration.

NOTE:
If you just wish to see how the label selection interface will look for a policy, you can use the
Label Preview action rather than starting an application after Publish Test Configuration.
There is a Test mode auditing setting that can be used to stop the capture of audit information
when Publish Test Configuration is invoked.

To test a configuration:
1. Establish a configuration that you wish to test.
2. Establish a folder in a suitable location into which test configurations can be published (e.g.
\\ICS-DC- 1\TestMode. This needs to be a file store folder:
l that can be written to by the Classifier Administration Service (and by the user under

which that service is running).

l that can be accessed (read) by the users who will use Test Mode Administration.

3. Select > Configuration Folder Paths, and enter the folder locations. Click OK.
4. Select Classifier Administration > Publish Test Configuration and provide a name for the
sub-folder that will hold the test configuration, and a reason for the publication.
5. Click OK.
5. See Test Mode Administration on page 40 for details of how to use the test configuration.

Test Mode Administration

End Test Mode is only enabled if there are no Classifier applications running. When a Classifier
application runs, it will operate in Test Mode.
For each system that is to be used as a platform for exploring test configurations:

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 40

 Manage Classifier Administration Settings / Publishing a Test Configuration

1. Ensure that the relevant base applications (e.g. Microsoft Office) are installed and working.
2. Ensure that Email and Office Classifier is installed.
3. Ensure that Classifier Test Mode Administration is installed (this is a separately installable
item that can be found in the TestModeAdministration folder under the Classifier
Administration installation structure.
4. Ensure that none of the Classifier applications (Word etc.) is running.
5. Run Classifier Test Mode Administration.
6. Define the location containing the test configurations (e.g. \\ICS-DC-1\TestMode). The
dialog is updated to show the available test configurations.
6. Select the required Test Configuration and click Run Test .
7. If the configuration contains multiple polices, select the policy to be used.
This test sequence will temporarily set specific registry settings that direct Classifier
applications to use the chosen test configuration and policy, rather than any deployed
configuration.
8. Start the applications to be tested.
A dialog shows the currently active (Classifier) applications.
9. Once you have checked the Classifier functionality, close all open affected applications (for
example, Word andOutlook).
10. Click End Test Mode on the Classifier Administration Policy Test dialog. When the
applications are restarted, they revert to standard operation.

Locking/Unlocking Configuration
Use the Lock Configuration action to indicate to other Classifier administrators that the
configuration should not be published at the moment (for example, because configuration
changes are incomplete). If the configuration is locked, the Unlock Configuration action is
displayed and the Publish Configuration action is inhibited.

Creating a Web Configuration

NOTE: If the action is unavailable, a policy could be locked.

Classifier clients and Classifier Management Agent retrieve master configuration updates from
the location defined using Classifier Configuration Settings. These may point to a file store
location, Active Directory, or a URL location.
For more detailed information about registry keys and entries, see the Classifier Registry Keys
Deployment and Troubleshooting Guide.
Before you start, ensure you have an established Classifier configuration.
If Classifier Management Agent is to be used, then you have already deployed the Classifier
Management Agent version 3.8.1 or later BUT configured to retrieve the master configuration
from the Active Directory or File Store, (that is, you have established the relevant registry entries
described in the Classifier Management Agent Guide.
To retrieve a configuration from a URL by Classifier Management Agent:

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 41

 Manage Classifier Administration Settings / Publishing a Test Configuration

1. Encrypt the master configuration and associated version.txt file.

a. Select the Classifier Administration node and choose Create Web Configuration.
b. Supply a password and click Save. The configuration (config) and version file are
saved to the folder defined by Folder for 'Create Web Configuration'. The dialog
shows the encrypted form of the password. The value shown is required to populate
the WebConfigKey registry entrythat allows the Classifier Clients or the Classifier
Management Agent to decrypt the configuration from the configured URL. See Web
Host Settings on page 194.
c. Click Copy to Clipboard, then click Close.
Whether the same password is used to encrypt subsequent iterations depends on
your site policy, but if the plain text password value changes, the WebConfigKey
registry entry must be updated accordingly. If the plain text password value does not
change the displayed WebConfigKey will be updated. However, there is no need to
update the registry entry for previously deployed clients. The default location for Web
Configuration publishing is under C:\ProgramData\BoldonJames\WebConfig Publish
Folder.
d. Check that the target (Zipped Configuration) folder contains both zip and version.txt
files.
e. Copy and paste both .zip and .txt files to your intended location.
Each time the Classifier Configuration is published, the version.txt file is re-written
containing a unique value. Management Agent uses the contents of this file on the
URL site to ascertain whether the (encrypted) configuration has changed.
f. Ensure that the relevant Web Host Settings are established, specifically the
encrypted passwordvalue is stored in WebConfigKey.
g. Maintain the URL configuration by repeating the steps above every time a new
master configuration is published.
2. Zip the master configuration and associated version.txt file on your designated web page.
3. Establish the necessary Web Host Settings.
4. When the Clients / Management Agent restarts, they retrieve the master configuration from
the designated web location.

Internet Information Services (IIS)

For Internet Information Services (IIS) it is recommended to:
1. Create a separate virtual directory to provide remote access to the two Classifier web
configuration files (the config.zip file and the version.txt file).
2. Map the virtual directory to a separate physical folder on the IIS server machine to contain
just those two files.
3. Use a secure connection (HTTPS) for client access to this virtual directory.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 42

 Applying Global Settings / Application Settings

Applying Global Settings

This section describes the configuration wide settings which apply to all users of Classifier
applications. They cannot be modified through the labelling policy.
Global Settings apply to all users in the site that have Office Classifier functionality installed. For
example, you can disable each Office application whilst leaving the software installed.

Application Settings
Application Settings apply to all users in the site that have Classifier functionality installed or
which control the availability of Administration functionality.
The list of settings appears in a table with alternative setting values ( Enabled / Disabled ) that you
can select from a drop down list available when you select the current value.
The settings supported are summarised in the table below. Changes will only take effect after
policy changes have been deployed and affected applications have been restarted.

Setting Description
AutoDesk CAD (These options only appears if the relevant component license
Dassault DraftSight has been applied).
Allows you to Enable / Disable CAD Classifier operation for the
specific application post installation.
Clearance check If enabled, the Email Domain Clearance features of Classifier
Email Domains Administration are available. Email Domain Clearance is
supported by Email, OWA and Notes Classifier. See Clearance
Checks and Settings on page 166 for details.
If Disabled, the Email Domain Clearance features are NOT
available within Classifier Administration
Clearance Library Enabled - The Clearance Library features of Classifier
Administration are available. Clearance Library entries are used
by SharePoint Classifier. See Clearance Checks and Settings
on page 166 for details.
Disabled - The Clearance Library features are NOT available
within Classifier Administration

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 43

 Applying Global Settings / Application Settings

Dynamic Clearances Enabled - The Dynamic Clearance features of Classifier

Administration are available. See Dynamic Clearances for
details.
Disabled - The Dynamic Clearance features are NOT available
within Classifier Administration.

NOTE: Note: For new Classifier configurations this settings

will be Enabled by default. For existing configurations the
setting is Disabled by default.

Maximum file size Defines the maximum size file (in KB) that File Classifier will
for icon overlay (in attempt to generate an icon overlay for. If no value is set the file
KB) size is unlimited.
l Type: integer (stored as string in config)
l Default Value: Not set, which means no restriction to
supported file size.
Microsoft Excel Enable / Disable for each individual application.
Microsoft Excel for
Mac Microsoft The Classifier functionality for an application can be activated
Outlook using this setting ( Enable / Disable ). Any Classifier
configuration associated with application is retained unchanged
Microsoft Outlook for even if the setting id disabled.
Mac Microsoft
PowerPoint The Mac options only appear if a suitable Classifier for Mac
Microsoft license has been applied.
PowerPoint for Mac
Microsoft Project
(2010 onwards only)
Microsoft Visio
(2010 onwards only)
Microsoft Word
Microsoft Word for
Mac

NOTE: There is no Enable/Disable setting for Outlook Web Access (OWA Classifier) or (Lotus)
Notes Classifier as these are Enabled / Disabled by server based Installation / Removal in
conjunction with a component license.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 44

 Applying Global Settings / Auditing

Auditing
Audit settings allow the administrator to control which operations are audited by applications that
have Classifier capabilities. Some settings may apply to most applications (e.g. Open), others are
only pertinent to a subset of the applications (e.g. Send is not applicable to documents – sending a
document will invoke Outlook which will take notice of this setting). Some actions are not audited
because of environment limitations (e.g. Save is not audited by OWA). Each setting takes the
value Enabled or Disabled.

Classifier Actions and Events

Setting Description
Automatic Audit the application of an automatic label upgrade. Enabling this option
label audits if a rule applying this check succeeds or fails – e.g. A message
upgrade label is automatically upgraded as a result of the addition of an
attachment not dominated by the message label.
Close event Audit the close action in Classifier-enabled Office applications. Enabling
this option audits if a Microsoft Office document is closed.
Document Audit the application and email protection, either RMS or S/MIME.
and Email Enabling this option audits if a rule applying S/MIME or RMS is actioned
Protection i.e. S/MIME security or RMS policy is applied to a document or email.
File label Audit when the file labels are added.
addition
NOTE: Only available if File Classifier is licensed.

Enabling this option audits if File Classifier adds a label to an item.

File label Audit when file labels are changed.
change
NOTE: Only available if File Classifier is licensed.

Enabling this option audits if File Classifier changes the label on an item.
File label Audit when file labels are removed.
removal
NOTE: Only available if File Classifier is licensed.

Enabling this option audits if File Classifier removes a label from an item.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 45

 Applying Global Settings / Auditing

Label Audit the labelling of email items in a folder.

Folder View
NOTE: This option is only applicable if you have the Allow Folder
View labelling Outlook option is Enabled.

If the Label Folder View setting is Enabled, Email Classifier audits any
use of the Folder View Labelling feature, recording the new label value,
and any previous label value.
Open event Audit the Open action in Classifier-enabled Office applications. Enabling
this option audits if an existing classifier document is opened
Print event Audit the Print action in Classifier-enabled Office applications. Enabling
this option audits if a request is made to print an object. (This setting is
not supported by Visio, Outlook, nor OWA ).
Save event Audit the Save action in Classifier-enabled Office applications. Enabling
this option audits if an object is saved. Note that this will also be triggered
by any background automatic Save actions (This setting is not supported
by OWA Classifier). Email Classifier will audit saving of Draft messages,
Outlook msg and template formats, but other formats including Html and
Word docs are not audited.
Send event Audit the Send action in Classifier-enabled Office applications. Enabling
this option audits if Outlook sends a message.

Classifier Checks
Setting Description
Attachment Audit the outcome of checking the labels of attachments against that
Check of the containing message.
Enabling this option audits if a rule applying this check succeeds or
fails – e.g. An attachment is found with a label not dominated by the
message label.
Author label Audit the outcome of performing an author label change check.
change check Enabling this option audits if a Check for Author label change rule
succeeds or fails – i.e. The 'Author' tries to change the value of a label
element when this is inhibited by such a rule for Office applications.
Content check Audit when the user uses content checking. Enabling this option
audits if a Content Checking rule is actioned. That is when a message
Subject, Body or Attachment contains a 'checked for phrase'. The
audit entry will contain the groups checked, the element (Subject /
Body / Attachment) that contained a 'checked for phrase'.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 46

 Applying Global Settings / Auditing

Default label Audit when the default label check is triggered. Enabling this option
check audits every time the configured Default Label Check rule is actioned.
Disable reply to Audit the outcome of performing a message disable reply to all check.
all check Enabling this option audits every time the Disable reply to all rule is
actioned.
Label change Audit the outcome of performing a label change check. Enabling this
check option audits if a Check for label change rule applying this check
succeeds or fails – i.e. The user tries to change the value of a label
element but the action is inhibited by the rules for application (Office,
Email, OWA, Notes or Mobile Classifier (Warn or Prevent).
Label expiry Audit the outcome of performing a label expiry check. Enabling this
check option audits if a Check these selectors for expiry rule succeeds or
fails.
Label Audit the outcome of validating the completeness of a label. Enabling
validation this option audits if a rule applying this check succeeds or fails.
check
Maximum Audit the outcome of performing a minimum message subject length
message check. Enabling this option audits if the Check subject length does
subject length not exceed rule is actioned.
check
Message size Audit the outcome of performing a message size check. Enabling this
check option audits if the Check message size does not exceed rule is
actioned.
Minimum Audit the outcome of performing a minimum message subject length
message check. Enabling this option audits if the Check subject length exceeds
subject length rule is actioned.
check
Number of Audit the outcome of performing a number of recipients check.
recipients Enabling this option audits if the Check number of recipients does not
check exceed rule is actioned.
Originator Audit the outcome of a clearance check on the message originator.
clearance Enabling this option audits if a rule applying this check fails – i.e. the
check Originator tries to send a message but does not have the required
clearance.
Recipient Audit the outcome of a clearance check on the message recipients.
Clearance Enabling this option audits if a rule applying this check succeeds or
Check fails – e.g. Originator tries to send a message to recipients that do not
have the required clearance

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 47

 Applying Global Settings / Auditing

Recipient list Audit outcome of performing a recipient list addition check. Enabling
addition check this option audits if a Check for additional recipients rule is actioned.
That is the user replies to or forwards a message that triggers such a
rule.
Recipient Type Audit the outcome of performing a recipient type check. Enabling this
check option audits if a Check recipient type rule is actioned.
Suggested Audit the outcome of performing a suggested classification check.
Classification Enabling this option audits if a Suggested classification check is
check actioned.
Unlabelled Audit when the unlabelled attachment check is triggered.
attachment
check
User warning Audit when the user warning check is triggered. Enabling this option
check audits if a User Warning check rule is actioned.

Options
The other settings configure whether an audit message is logged to the system application event
log. The audit message describes the event which has taken place. An event ID and user ID is
included when an audit takes place.

Setting Description
Always Use When auditing email addresses always try to obtain an SMTP address.
SMTP Note: This setting applies to Email Classifier, OWA Classifier and Notes
addresses Classifier.
Enabled - Auditing will attempt to obtain an SMTP address for the
sender and all recipients. In some situations this can lead to significant
delays because no SMTP address can be found.
Disabled - Classifier auditing will use the email address it has available.
Test mode Perform selected auditing operations even in the `test` mode. mode.
auditing Enabling this option audits activities performed whilst running in Test
Mode. Disabling this setting will stop events being logged when in Test
Mode.

Privacy Settings
There are five privacy settings in the list that affect all auditing. These allow you to mask selected
pieces of information from audit logs. The privacy settings are:

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 48

 Applying Global Settings / Languages

Setting Description Enabled/Disabled

Mask document Obscure the document file Enabled - The item is replaced in
file name name on save. the audit entry by *** (three
asterisks).
Mask document Obscure the document title on
title save. Disabled - The item is included in
the audit entry.
Mask message Obscure the message
attachment names attachment names on
submission.
Mask message Obscure the message
recipient email recipient email addresses on
addresses submission.
Mask message Obscure the message subject
subject on submission.

An example of event message content and a list of the different event messages can be found in
Auditing Event Messages on page 221 .

Languages
Classifier Administration allows you to configure all the text presented to users through the
various Classifier features. However, these basic facilities support a single set of definitions which
equate to a Configuration default language .
The Configuration default language is initially English, but you can change the presentation
values configured for this 'language' using the language mechanisms described in this document.
Classifier Languages mechanisms allow you to support multiple languages such that the text
presented to each user is appropriate (site configurable) for their chosen Language / Country.
The Languages to be supported are defined by selecting the Languages node. Initially the list only
includes the Configuration default language entry.
When a Language is added to the configuration, it has no language specific values defined. You
must configure each required value, if an item does not have a language specific value defined,
the Algorithm (below) will be used to produce a value for display.
You can add additional language entries, and delete any language entry except for the
Configuration default language (you will be warned that all associated values will be lost). This list
of languages is presented wherever per Language values may be configured (see table below).
Selected languages can be of the form Language (Country) or Language (e.g. French(Belgium)
or French ). Algorithm for finding the text to display.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 49

 Applying Global Settings / Languages

Algorithm for finding the text to display

Once the language configuration is complete and deployed, the Classifier applications (e.g. Office
Classifier) will observe the algorithm below to obtain the 'appropriate' text to display (e.g. button
caption, User message etc.)
There is no defined value if:
l the item of interest ( e.g. User message) has a value defined (not blank) for a Language
(Country) setting that exactly matches the current environment, then use that value,
l If the item of interest has a value defined for the (culture neutral) Language , that matches
the current environment then use that value, otherwise:
l If the item of interest has a value defined for the Policy Default Language , then use that
value
l If the item of interest has a value defined for the Configuration Default Language , then use
that value
Thus you only have to define Language specific values if the algorithm described above would not
yield an appropriate value from one of the other Languages.
For example, you might have a French speaking community to serve, where most users can use
general French, but a few settings require community specific values (e.g. a Swiss variant of
French). You would then:
l define French and French/Swiss as your supported languages;
l configure the full range of values (actually only those essential for your environment) for
French
l set French as your policy default
l configure French/Swiss variants only for those items that specifically require a different
value. Features supporting Language mechanisms

Global No Facilities (Not Applicable)

Settings
User Message You can define per language Title, Text and Help URL link values for
Library each message through the Message Properties.
You can select which Language settings the User Message List
presents.
User Interface You can define per language values for each of the configurable text
Library items.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 50

 Applying Global Settings / Languages

Selector Limited facilities are provided (see features excluded table below).
Library
Per language values for the Caption and Tooltip can be defined for
each selector. Equivalent policy settings are also available.
Single selection list supports localisation (Languages) of selector
Value Name, Tooltip, Portion, and Alternate Name /2/3 .
You can select which Language related settings the Set Selector
view presents.
You can also make use of the Alternate names which can be defined
for Single Selection Lists, Multiple Selection lists, and Date offset
Lists.
Marking Library No facilities (see features excluded table below).
Content Library No facilities (not applicable).
Configuration No facilities (not applicable).
Settings
Policies The Policy default language can be defined as described in
Properties (Policy).
Per language values for the Caption and Tooltip can be defined for
each selector (Set Selectors).
Policy / Single Per language values for the Caption and Tooltip can be defined for
Click each Single Click button.
Clearance No facilities (not applicable).
Settings

The following Classifier features are excluded from the Languages mechanisms (are not site
translatable):

Features Description
Marking Formats Markings present business policy information (e.g. sensitivity)
which must be meaningful to all users. Supporting different
markings for different locales would be confusing to end users.
Sites can make their Markings multi-language (e.g. include both
German and English in a LLOT disclaimer).
(Not recommended) Sites may assign separate policies
(applying different Markings) to different groups (languages) of
users.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 51

 Applying Global Settings / License

"No Marking" text is For the same reasons as Marking Formats above. Sites can
not translatable define composite text if required, e.g. No Marking / Pas Marking
/ Nein Marking / ...
Selector values are Multiple selection list and Date offset list do NOT support
not translatable localisation (Languages) of selector Value Name, Tooltip,
Portion and Alternate Name /2/3.

NOTE: Selector Captions and Tooltips do support the

Languages mechanisms.

Classifier English only

Administration
Interface
Administrators The product as shipped provides English only.
Documentation
Administrators on-
line Help
Auditing English only
User URL help page A single link can be defined. The site can provide language
(available on the related redirection at the web server using the browser supplied
Label selection locale.
interface).

License
The features available to users are determined by the configuration established using Classifier
Administration and deployed to those users.
Classifier Administration only enables configuration of features for which the site is licensed.
A License may be effective for a limited duration (e.g. for evaluation), subscription, or in perpetuity
(Full).

NOTE: This document describes all features supported by Classifier. Depending upon the
licenses you have, some features may not appear or be greyed out. For example, if you do
not have a license for OWA Classifier, then OWA Classifier features will be unavailable.

Initial installation will supply one or more Classifier license files in the License sub-folder. Each
license file has a name of the form IMP xxx .LIC, where xxx relates to the feature or option (e.g.
IMPCEM - Email Classifier; IMPCOF - Office Classifier; IMPCOW - OWA Classifier; IMPCLN -
Notes Classifier).

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 52

 Applying Global Settings / License

The initial installation has no license files applied to the configuration. Each license is applied
using the sequence described below. If a site purchases additional options, an additional license
file is supplied which can be merged into the existing license settings.

NOTE: For Citrix environments, Classifier licenses are on a per user basis, thus there is no
difference if a user is using Email or Office Classifier using Citrix or that same user is using a
Windows desktop, or using Windows Terminal Server. OWA Classifier requires its own
license.

License Filenames
The following are applicable license files:
l impBOX Box Classifier
l impCAD CAD Classifier for AutoCAD
l impCAD (DraftSight) CAD Classifier for DraftSight
l impCEM Email Classifier
l impCLN Notes Classifier
l impCMB Mobile Classifier
l impCOF Office Classifier
l impCOW OWA Classifier and Classifier Mail Add-in
l impBLK Power Classifier for Files
l impCRP Classifier Reporting Console
l impCRS Classifier Reporting Service
l impCPA Power Classifier for Administration
l impDCS Data Classification Service
l impEXC Exchange Classifier
l impMOF Mac Classifier
l impFCF File Classifier
l impSPC SharePoint Classifier

License Codes
These are the license codes associated with each licensed Classifier product. The license file
supplied will be made up of this code prefixed with "imp", e.g. impCRS for the Classifier Reporting
Service. This applies up to and including version 1.3.1 and has been superceded by the Classifier
Reporting Service CRS license for v1.4 onwards.
l Box Classifier BOX
l CAD Classifier CAD
l Classifier API CPI
l Classifier Reporting Service CRS
l Data Classification Service DCS
l Email Classifier CEM

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 53

 Applying Global Settings / License

l Exchange Classifier EXC

l File Classifier FCF
l Mac Classifier MOF
l Mobile Classifier CMB
l Notes Classifier CLN
l Office Classifier COF
l OWA Classifier COW
l Power Classifier BLK
l Power Classifier for Administration CPA
l SharePoint Classifier SPC
NOTE: This applies up to and including version 1.3.1 and has been superseded by the
Classifier Reporting Service CRS license for v1.4 onwards.

l Classifier Reporting Tool CRP

l Classifier API CPI

Installing a License
To install a license file:
1. Run Classifier Administration.
2. Select Global Settings.
3. Choose License.
4. Click Add / Update.
5. Browse to the location of the new license file, select the file, and click Open .
For an initial installation, the default location to find License files is in folders (one per
license) below the License sub-folder on the Classifier Base bundle. The selected file is
merged into the existing license file and the License Management dialog will be updated to
reflect the changes. License consistency will be checked when you click OK . When
upgrading an existing license, you may have to update all current licenses before clicking
OK.
Selecting an entry in the list and clicking Details will show further information about the
license.

NOTE: If you have difficulty merging a new license on to an existing system, you are likely
breaking the restrictions. Do not exit the license dialog until all product licenses have been
updated.

Restrictions
There are certain limitations applied by the license management software:

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 54

 Applying Global Settings / License

l All licenses must be at the same level (3 or 4). For example, you cannot use an (historic)
Email Classifier Standard Edition license (Level 3) and an Enterprise Edition (Level 4)
Office Classifier license. Therefore, to add the Enterprise Edition Level 4 license for the
Office Classifier to a configuration that contains Email and Office Classifier, you need to
obtain and apply an Enterprise Edition (Level 4) license for Email Classifier at the same
time.
l You can update Evaluation licenses to a Full licenses, but not revert from a Full to an
Evaluation license. You can have a configuration that includes a mixture of Full and
Evaluation licenses. If an Evaluation license expires, the features it licenses are
disabled/unavailable.
l If you wish to stop using one licensed feature (e.g. OWA Classifier), and want to ensure that
only the relevant features are made unavailable in Classifier Administration, you may have
to reimplement your configuration using only the subset licenses now required, or request
assistance from Classifier support.
l For historic licenses, you must use at least a Standard Edition (Level 3) license if you have
an existing configuration created with Classifier Administration Console Version 1.0.

Viewing Client License Information

The current Classifier License status can be inspected from Email and Office Classifier (e.g.
Outlook, Word etc.) applications. You can see such information as license type and licensed
components.
1. From the Options menu on the Classifier Label interface, select About Classifier.
NOTE: Not available under Classifier Mail Add-in or Mobile Classifier.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 55

 Image Library / Adding a new Image

Image Library
NOTE:
Classifier currently only supports images stored as .JPG, .JPEG or .PNG files.
Images stored in the configuration are limited to a maximum size of 5Mb, and if you add an
image greater than 500Kb, a warning will be displayed.

The Image Library allows you to define site specific images to be displayed to the end user in
some circumstances (Single Click configuration option, and specific Word, PowerPoint rules).
This section describes how you establish these images and their usage.
The set of images is managed through the Image Library node in the Classifier Configuration. The
full set of images is available for the Administrator for selection in all Classifier Policies.
If you intend to configure a Rule that supports an image, you should ensure that a suitable image
is available before defining the rule, or define the image at the image selection point in the rule
definition sequence using the "New..." option.

Adding a new Image

1. Select the Image Library and choose Add a new image.
2. select Browse to locate an image.
3. Enter a description.
4. Click OK.

Editing an Image
1. Select the Image Library, select an image, and choose Properties.
2. If desired, change the image and/or description.
3. Click OK.

Deleting an Image
Ensure the image is not in use before deleting. If you attempt to delete an image that is still
referenced from one or more rules, for example, the action fails and you will be see a list of the
rules that use the image.
1. Select the Image Library, select an image, and choose Delete.
2. Click Yes to confirm deletion.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 56

 User Message Library / Use Of User Messages

User Message Library

The User Message Library allows you to define site specific messages to be presented to the end
user instead of default product messages. This section describes how you establish these
messages and their usage.
The set of User Messages is managed through the User Message Library node in the Classifier
Configuration. The full set of messages is available for the Administrator for selection in all
Classifier Policies. If you use multiple Classifier Policies, you can define alternative texts for use
in different policies.
If you intend to configure a Rule that shows a User Message configuration option, ensure that a
suitable message is available before defining the rule, or define the message at the message
selection point in the rule definition sequence. The set of rules that require User Messages is
defined in Use Of User Messages on page 57.
Selecting the User Message Library node displays a list of the currently defined messages. This
list initially contains pre-defined messages which you can use as you wish.

Use Of User Messages

Check rules, in the Policy configuration, perform checks that allow you to select the message that
is displayed to the end user, or to define reasons shown to users if you use the Challenge
Options.
For example, an Outlook rule to check recipient clearance refers to a this message item: Check
clearance for recipients. Warn user if check fails with this message.
The rule template appears with a value ( Warn - Unapproved recipients ) supplied as a
placeholder as in the example below:

Click the current value (placeholder) and a list appears showing the set of configured messages
from which you can select.
The full set of rules requiring User messages is defined in Check rules.

Adding a New Message to the User

Message Library
To add a new message:

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 57

 User Message Library / Viewing Message Properties

1. Select the User Message Library and choose Add a new message.
2. Enter a unique name for the message. This is the value that will appear in a list of
messages available to you when defining various rules.
3. Select a Language. For information on defining Language specific values, see Languages.
4. Enter a Title that will appear on the dialog that appears to the end user when this message
is to be displayed.
5. Enter Message Text. The display area in the run time dialog only shows the first three lines
of the message text. The user can click for more information to see the rest of the text. You
can use the following tags to format the text:
l {B}{/B} for bold

l {I}{/I} for italics

l {U}{/U} for underline

l {C value=”colour”}{/C} for colour. You can use a predefined colour from

https://wpf.2000things.com/2011/02/17/220-using-the-predefined-colors or a # hex
RGB value
l {#href=”<URL>” #text="Text for Link"} for hyperlinks

l For example, if you want your message to display as This function will cause an

error. Go to Microsoft help, then enter This function {B}{U} will{/B}{/U} cause an {C
value= “Firebrick”} error{/C}. Got to {#href=” https://support.microsoft.com/
#text=”Microsoft help”}
6. If you want, enter a Help URL that you can use to provide users with access to further
information. If this is not configured, the value defined in URL for your labelling help (in
General Settings) displays. If this is populated, the message will provide a Help button,
otherwise the Help button will be disabled.
7. Click OK.

Viewing Message Language

By default, the User Messages list shows the messages and associated text for the Configuration
default language.
Select the Language action to see a drop down list of the currently configured languages.
Selecting a language will update the message list to show the Message Text configured for each
message for that language.

Viewing Message Properties

You can change any aspect of a message definition. Changing the name of a message (Rename)
essentially deletes the selected message and creates a new one, updating any references to the
message in existing Rules.
To change a message definition:
1. Select the User Message Library and select the relevant message .
2. Choose the Properties action.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 58

 User Message Library / Copying Messages

3. Change the relevant details.

4. Click OK.

Copying Messages
You can create a new message by using an existing one as a base.
1. Select the User Message Library and select the relevant base message.
2. Choose the Copy action. This will create a new Message entry with the name "<Message
name> - Copy<#>".
3. Select the copied message and click Properties to change the relevant details.
4. Click OK.

Deleting Message
You may delete a message that you have created. Messages that are created from a Label
Configuration template cannot be deleted since they are associated with rules in the template.
You should confirm that there are no outstanding uses of that message before proceeding. If you
attempt to delete a message that is still referenced from one or more rules, the action will fail and
you will be presented with a list of the rules that use the message.
To delete a message:
1. Select the User Message Library and select the message to be deleted.
2. Choose the Delete action.
3. Click Yes to confirm you want to delete the message.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 59

 User Interface Library / Pre-configured UI Elements

User Interface Library

Some text in Classifier is controlled by the site through the User Message Library. However, other
aspects of user presentation (e.g. Button captions and tooltips) have default values built into the
code.
The User Interface Library allows you to create and manage one or more User Interface
Definitions which can override these default values. Each policy then defines, through Properties
(Policy), the User Interface Definition (UI definition) to use. There is a fixed default UI definition
assumed when policies are created.
The initial state of the User Interface Library shows no UI definitions.The Default UI definition is
always hidden and cannot be changed.

Pre-configured UI Elements
The User Interface Library contains the following preconfigured UI elements that you can
customize:

UI element Description
Challenge Displays choices when a rule definition is configured to use the
Challenge Options. See Policies on page 134.
Classification Displays the stored label history for the document. Allows you to
History change the text presented to the user through the Classifier History
Display dialog which appears subject to the Classification History and
Classification History Display setting.
Content Displays any matches when a content check occurs. These items are
Inspection only relevant to Email Classifier (Outlook) and Office Classifier.
Check
Allows you to change the text presented to the user if a content check
rule detects content of interest, and the user then selects View .

NOTE: The text presented to the user in the initial Policy Check
dialog is configured either via the User MessageLibrary or
through the Policy Check item.

Decision Tree Helps the user with label seletion using question and answer
combinations. A user can view and modify user interface definitions
that are available for configuration.
File Classifier Displays the reasons and available options if errors or policy failures
occur when labelling files. These items are only relevant to File
Classifier license has been applied.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 60

 User Interface Library / Pre-configured UI Elements

Folder View Displays failures on label change checks when performing Folder
Labelling View Labelling. See Labelling Configurations on page 66. This
feature is only relevant to Email Classifier (Outlook).

NOTE: The text presented to the user in the initial Policy Check
dialog is configured either via the User MessageLibrary or
through the Policy Check item.

General Displays messages configured by the client. There are miscellaneous

Messages values that do not relate to any other item in a UI Definition and are
grouped under this General Messages item. See General message
options on page 63.
Label Selection Contains all available selectors.
Management Displays status information and alerts relating to Classifier
Agent applications monitored by the Management Agent. These items are
only relevant if you are using the Classifier Management Agent which
is configured to Show the System Tray Icon. See the Classifier
Management Agent Guide for more information.
Menus Displays pop-up menus used in dialogs and the ribbon as per Label
Selection Interfaces, Label Options, Favourites and Portion Mark .

NOTE: Some of these items will only appear if an Enterprise

license is applied and/or a feature is Enabled.

Organise Accessed from the Favourites menu.

Favourites
Policy Check Displays reasons and options If policy checks fail when sending an
email or saving a document. The Back button may be unavailable in
some circumstances. See Labelling Configurations on page 66 and
Labelling Configurations on page 66. The subordinate box titles (for
example, Unapproved recipients) are taken from the 'Title' of the user
message associated with the rule, not the Name of the massage (for
example, Name = Warn - Unapproved recipients / Title =Unapproved
recipients).

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 61

 User Interface Library / Adding a New UI Definition

Ribbon Holds the selectors in a Classifier application and some associated

options. The menus can be configured in the Menus section.
Definitions for the button text are:
l Select Label: The text of the ribbon menu that displays the
labeller dialog to create or edit a label.
l Show Label: The text of the ribbon menu to show the label
dialog in read-only mode.
l Label selected message(s): For Outlook Explorer folder view
labelling.
l Set Label: The text of the ribbon menu to change a label on an
existing received message (only applies if Folder View
Labelling is enabled)
l Label Dialog: The text of the ribbon menu that allows a user to
add additional label elements that are not available on the
ribbon when in single click mode.
RMS Apply Enables the user to choose an RMS template. Allows you to change
Template the text displayed to the user as a result of an Apply RMS policy or
option rule.
RMS Apply Allows the user to create custom RMS permissions. Allows you to
User change the text displayed to the user through when they click the
Permissions Apply Ad Hoc protection button on the Policy Check dialog shown in
response to a Check for RMS protection rule.

Adding a New UI Definition

To add a new UI definition:
1. Select the User Interface Library and choose the Add a new UI definition action.
2. Provide a unique Name and optional Description .
3. Click OK.

Viewing and Changing Properties of a UI

Definition
You can view and make changes to the UI definitions you created and to the ones that are pre-
configured. To view and modify the Properties of a UI definition:

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 62

 User Interface Library / Copying a UI definition

1. Select User Interface Library and select the relevant UI definition .

2. Select the Properties action. If you have created the UI elements, you can view and change
only the name and description. If you are viewing and changing the pre-configured
UI elements:
a. Select a Language - [Only visible if Allow multiple languages is enabled]. You only
need to define Language specific values if the algorithm defined in Languages on
page 49 would not yield a suitable value from another configured Language.
b. Make changes to the other options in each element as desired.
c. Click OK.

Copying a UI definition
You can copy a UI definition by:
1. Select the User Interface Library and select the UI definition you wish to copy.
2. Click Copy. This will clone the existing UI definition with a name of <original name>(#).
3. Select the new copy UI definition and make changes as required.

Deleting a UI Definition
You cannot delete a UI Definition if it is in use in a policy. You can delete only those definitions
you created.
To delete a UI definition:
1. Select the User Interface Library and select the UI definition you wish to delete.
2. Select Delete.
3. Click Yes to confirm you want to delete the definition.
4. Click OK.

General message options

General message Relevance
Classifier is currently operating in See Publishing a Test Configuration on
Configuration Test Mode. page 40
Do you want to save the changes you Only applicable to Microsoft Excel.
made to {0}? Classifier has to replace the standard
application dialog to ensure consistent
operation
Failed to calculate high watermark - See Policies on page 134
leaving document label at original value.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 63

 User Interface Library / Deleting a UI Definition

Failed to calculate high watermark - See Policies on page 134

leaving message label at original value.
It is not possible to downgrade the label. See Labelling Configurations on page 66
The item contains a label with a higher and Labelling Configurations on page 66
value than the overall label.
This cell is not empty. A portion mark See Labelling Configurations on page 66
cannot be inserted here.
Unable to insert the label into the An attempt to set the label on an item.
document since it is marked as protected.
Unable to insert a portion marking since See Labelling Configurations on page 66
the document is protected.
Unable to insert the label into the An attempt to set the label on an item
document since it is marked as read-only.
Unable to insert a portion marking since See Labelling Configurations on page 66
the document is read-only.
Your labelling policy requires you to save See Microsoft Project only
this document before you send it.
Your labelling policy requires you to save This is obsolete for Office 2003
this document before you send it. Would
you like to save the document now?
Your labelling policy requires you to save This is obsolete for Office 2003
this presentation before you send it. Would
you like to save the presentation now?
Your labelling policy requires you to save This is obsolete for Office 2003
this workbook before you send it. Would
you like to save the workbook now?
Failed to access attachment. Warn if file contents cannot be accessed
It is not possible to change the label at this An attempt to set the label on an item
time as this item is protected.
Please Wait... Whenever a progress dialog is presented
Updating workbook... Indicates Classifier is applying policy
rules
Updating workbook footers... No longer used
Updating workbook headers... No longer used

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 64

 User Interface Library / Deleting a UI Definition

Completing update of workbook... Indicates Classifier is applying policy

rules
New Default Label applied successfully. See Policies on page 134
You must restart Office for your change to
take effect
Classifier Attachment List Allows you to enter general email content

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 65

 Labelling Configurations / Add a Label Configuration

Labelling Configurations
NOTE: At this time, only a single Labelling Configuration is supported.

Most Classifier settings are held in a Labelling Configuration (with the exception of the Settings
applicable across the organisation). The initial installation has no labelling configuration defined.
A Configuration is established by an administrator who can then publish that configuration to a
master location. To make a change to the master configuration, retrieve the master configuration,
operate on it locally, and then publish the update.
A labelling configuration is based on a template configuration. The product is supplied with a
number of template configurations including an Empty Configuration.

NOTE: Pay attention if more than one person is making changes to the configuration, See
Configuration Deployment.

After installation, you must define and publish a Label Configuration to access the features.

Add a Label Configuration

NOTE: Configuration features are made available according to the features licensed. Before
creating a configuration, you must apply at least one license using the features described
under

NOTE: If you try to create a configuration before you apply a license, Classifier Administration
will direct you to supply a license.

If there is an existing (Master) configuration that you should retrieve from a central location using
Get Server Configuration .
To add a new label configuration:
1. Select Labelling Configurations and choose Add a new label configuration.
2. Enter the Name of your Labelling Configuration. This name may be included as the
Configuration Name element in Marking Format definitions (e.g. Classifier test).
3. Choose a Category and select the Template most appropriate to your environment.
4. If there is no license currently applied (e.g. immediately after installation) when you select
Add a new Label Configuration, apply a license file.
a. Click the Browse button, and navigate to the location of the license file to be applied
(e.g. below Base Bundle\License.
b. Select a .LIC file and click Open . This will populate the License File field. [These
license files are limited period evaluation licenses).
5. Click OK.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 66

 Labelling Configurations / Deleting a Label

Renaming a Label
Classifier maintains the unique identifier originally assigned, and so pre-existing Label values are
still valid.
To rename a label:
1. Select Labelling Configurations and s elect the relevant configuration .
2. Choose Properties.
3. Enter a new name and then click OK .
NOTE: This will change the local name of the configuration. To make this Configuration
operational you will have to Publish the configuration and ensure that all client
environments are updated to refer to the new configuration.

Deleting a Label
You can delete your local Labelling Configuration. This removes the local information, but will not
affect any published location.
To delete your local Labelling Configuration:
1. Select Labelling Configurations and select the relevant configuration.
2. Choose Delete.
3. By default, any licenses applied are retained and available in a Label Configuration you
then create. If you need to remove the existing licenses, check the Delete licenses in use by
this configuration option. You will then have to apply licenses to any new configurations.
4. Click Yes to confirm you want to delete the configuration.

Selector Library
NOTE: The names of Selectors and Selector values must be unique within the configuration to
avoid ambiguities when parsing text labels.

A Label (Classification) is made up of one or more Selector Values that together “classify” an
object (document / message) with that label, defining qualities such as sensitivity / importance /
operational handling. For example, a label may just contain non-disclosure information.
Selecting the Selector Library node shows a list of the configured Selectors and the Values
defined for the currently selected Selector.

NOTE: The Select Library is initially empty if you are using the Empty Configuration Template.

Each Selector defines one or more Values that may be selected by the end user (using the Label
Selection interface). The Selector Library defines the Selectors and Values supported by this
Label Configuration. However, the Selectors and Values actually available to end users are

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 67

 Labelling Configurations / Selector Library

defined through a Policy which allows Selectors and / or Values to be hidden from selected users
according to the policy that is assigned to them.
Control over which Selectors and values are presented to end users is actually controlled as part
of Policy definition. Selectors and Values must be specifically chosen for presentation in a policy.
You should define all Selectors that are meaningful in your Label Configuration. This may include
Selectors that are not included in all policies. This may arise for example because one of your
Selectors is only relevant to a specific set of users. This does not preclude those (limited) users
from receiving labels containing values from the ‘hidden’ selector.
All Selectors can be shown through the standard Marking Format mechanisms. The behaviour
when a user receives a document or email message containing a value relating to such a ‘hidden’
selector is described in Policies on page 134.
By default, a Selector is not Mandatory – that is a Label may be valid if it has no Value chosen for
this Selector. To make a Selector mandatory, configure Check these mandatory selectors rules
when you add a rule. Selector values are relevant to any Check for the high-water mark rules
(Email, OWA and Notes).

Active, Obsolete, and Retained Selectors and

Values
Selectors and Selector Values can be referred to as Active / Obsolete or Retained. Sselector
values available in the current policy are available to the user when setting the label value.
For information Obsolete Values, see Making Selectors Obsolete/Restoring Selectors on page
77.

Selector Description
Active Selector values 'added' into a policy are deemed Active. They are
available for the user to choose as a label value. Active values in an
existing label are used as the initial value for a new object (for example,
forward an email).
Retained You may have Selectors that are only available for selection by some
users. Other users may only be able to receive email messages
containing those Selector values, but you want them to forward an email
containing the restricted selector value - that is, to retain the label value
when Forwarding. You can mark a selector as being retained via the
appropriate checkbox on the selector in the Selectors in Policy dialog.
Retained Selectors can be used in Policy Rules in the same way as active
selectors and are processed by downgrading rules. Thus, if you add a
Selector to a Policy as a retained selector then any rules associated with
that selector and its values are retained and applied in the policy.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 68

 Labelling Configurations / Selector Library

Label Dominance
If high-water mark (HWM) checks are configured by a rule, then when a mail message is sent, the
message label must dominate the labels of any attachments (and optionally Portion Marks).

NOTE: If you are using Portion Marking in Email Classifier and require message labels to
dominate all Portion marks in the email message body you must also Enable - Ensure label
dominates all portion marking.

The Label Dominance algorithm employs a different check depending upon the selector type:

Selector Descrioption
Type
Single (If Include this selector in clearance and attachment checks is un-
Selection checked the selector takes no part in label dominance operations)
List
The operation depends on the Hierarchy setting for a Single selection list:
l Hierarchic: The message label value is set to the 'highest' value
from the message and attachment labels.
l No Hierarchy: The user will have to be involved in resolving any
incompatible label issues*.
Multi- (If Include this selector in clearance and attachment checks is not
Selection checked, the selector takes no part in label dominance operations).
List
The union of all values for the selector from the message and
attachments is formed, and subject to the configured Maximum, is applied
to the message label. If the Maximum is exceeded, then the user will be
involved in resolving the issue*.
Freeform Freeform text selectors take no part in Label Dominance (HWM) checks.
text
Date pick The message label value will be set to the 'highest' date of those set on
the label and attachments.
Date item

* For Single valued selectors, it may not be possible to modify the message label to fully dominate
the attachment labels.
For example: consider two selectors Classification (Hierarchic) and Department (non-hierarchic)
and an email message containing two attachments labelled as Unmarked / Sales and
Confidential / Engineering. While setting a message label of Confidential would address the
Classification values, there is no single Department value that can encompass both Sales and
Engineering.
Similar difficulties can arise with Multiple selection list selectors if more values would be required
than are allowed by the maximum number of values allowed.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 69

 Labelling Configurations / Selector Library

In either of the above circumstances, the user should resolve the issue (for example, modify the
attachments, or use the override check option if available).

Adding a Single Selection List

Single selection list selectors can take part in Clearance checking, high-water mark checks (Label
Dominance) and Check for Label Change on Reply/Forward. Single selection list selectors can be
displayed in the Ribbon Bar.
To add a selector:
1. Select the Selector Library, choose Add a new selector, and choose Single selection list.
2. Enter a name for the selector, and, if you are configuring Titus interoperability, enter a Titus
field name - the name that will map the Titus field to a Classifier selector. If this is empty,
then the Classifier selector name is used.
3. Select the Language.
By default, the Selector Library list displays the selector Captions and Tooltips defined for
the Configuration default language. Any Caption or Tooltip shown in the upper pane which
has not had a language specific value defined will be blank. The lower pane will show the
Value Name, Tooltip, Portion, Alternate name /2/3 values defined for that language. If no
specific value has been defined, then a value is derived using the Algorithm defined in
Languages on page 49.
4. Enter a caption. This is the name displayed to the end user. The value may be overridden
by a Caption setting at the Policy level. The value should be short enough to fit into the
ribbon bar area that displays the label selection interface. Check that the effects are
reasonable in all relevant environments (for example, Outlook / OWA / Notes / Office etc.).
If you do not set this explicitly, then the Selector Name is used as the caption.
5. Enter a tooltip. This is an optional string that appears if a user hovers over the Selector in
the Label Selection area of the ribbon bar (maximum length 1000). If no value is chosen, or
there is no Tooltip defined for the selected value, then the Tooltip defined for the parent
Selector will be shown.
Due to the nature of the environment, some unusual characters within a tooltip

6. Click New to insert a row.

a. Enter a value name. The name must be unique for this selector and in the
Configuration to avoid confusion and miss parsing of text markings.
b. If you are configuring Titus interoperability, enter a Titus Field Value Name. If you do
not enter a name, the Selector Name or Alternate Name is used.
c. Select a colour.
d. Select an image. The images are stored in the Image Library. See Image Library on
page 56.
e. Enter a tooltip. This is an optional string that appears if a user hovers over the
Selector in the Label Selection area of the ribbon bar (maximum length 1000). If no
value is chosen, or there is no Tooltip defined for the selected value, then the Tooltip
defined for the parent selector will be shown.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 70

 Labelling Configurations / Selector Library

f. Enter a Portion Marking. This is a text string that allows you to allocate a short form of
the Label Value so that when you wish to mark parts of a Word document or email
message as “Confidential" or "Public", the short form ( or portion marking value) is
inserted instead. For example: [P] indicating that this text may be circulated publicly.
[C] indicating that this text is confidential and must not be circulated publicly. If you
are not using Portion marking in emails or Word, then you can leave this setting
blank. See Portion Mark on page 20 for further details.
g. Enter alternate names if you wish to establish different Marking Formats to encode
the current label value in different ways. For example, you may wish to establish a
Marking Format which displays the selected values in full and use that format in
Headers and Footers; but for Subject Prefix in email messages, you may require
shortened forms (for example, Public - > Pub). Up to three “alternate names” for a
value can be defined using these properties. When you configure a Marking Format,
you can use either the Value Name or any configured Alternative name.
h. Click Update.
7. Select a hierarchy.
This setting is only relevant if Include this selector in clearance and attachment checks is
set. [Hierarchy has no impact on Clearance checks since all clearances are specific]. Three
choices are available via the drop-down list.
l No Hierarchy: this Selector does not operate as a Hierarchy. The Hierarchy column is

removed from the dialog. Selecting No Hierarchy in conjunction with Include this
selector in clearance and attachment checks will cause the user to have issues such
as High-water mark checks detecting differences between message label and
attachment labels that might be resolved automatically if the selector was Hierarchic.
l Hierarchical based on the value order: the Selector operates as a Hierarchy and the

order of appearance is the same as the display order (The value at the top of the list
is dominated by the second in the list in turn dominated by the third…). The hierarchy
value is automatically derived from the position (and is sequential - 1,2,3...).
l Hierarchical with manual configuration: The Selector operates as a hierarchy, but you

must set the relative order manually (through the Edit Values dialog / Hierarchy
column). The value assigned a hierarchy value of 1 is dominated by the value
assigned 2, which is dominated by 3 etc. Choosing this value makes the relevant
cells editable and allows the display order to be different to the hierarchy order.
Note: If you define the hierarchy values sequentially starting at 1, then Classifier will
detect this and automatically switch the setting to Hierarchical based on the value
order. You can change this by assigning different values.
8. Select the Include this selector in clearance, attachmen and portion marking checks if you
want the selectors to be included in high water mark and clearance checks.
9. Click OK.

Adding a Multi-Selection List

Multiple selection list selectors can take part in Clearance checking, high-water mark checks
(Label Dominance) and Check for Label Change.
To add a selector:

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 71

 Labelling Configurations / Selector Library

1. Select the Selector Library and choose Add a new selector and choose Single selection list.
2. Enter a name for the selector, and, if you are configuring Titus interoperability, enter a Titus
field name - the name that will map the Titus field to a Classifier selector. If this is empty,
then the Classifier selector name is used.
3. Select the Language.
By default, the Selector Library list displays the selector Captions and Tooltips defined for
the Configuration default language. Any Caption or Tooltip shown in the upper pane which
has not had a language specific value defined will be blank. The lower pane will show the
Value Name, Tooltip, Portion, Alternate name /2/3 values defined for that language. If no
specific value has been defined, then a value is derived using the Algorithm defined in
Languages on page 49.
4. Enter a caption. This is the name displayed to the end user. The value may be overridden
by a Caption setting at the Policy level. The value should be short enough to fit into the
ribbon bar area that displays the label selection interface. Check that the effects are
reasonable in all relevant environments (for example, Outlook / OWA / Notes / Office etc.).
If you do not set this explicitly, then the Selector Name is used as the caption.
5. Enter a tooltip. This is an optional string that appears if a user hovers over the Selector in
the Label Selection area of the ribbon bar (maximum length 1000). If no value is chosen, or
there is no Tooltip defined for the selected value, then the Tooltip defined for the parent
Selector will be shown.
Due to the nature of the environment, some unusual characters within a tooltip

6. Click New to insert a row.

a. Enter a value name. The name must be unique for this selector and in the
Configuration to avoid confusion and miss parsing of text markings.
b. If you are configuring Titus interoperability, enter a Titus Field Value Name. If you do
not enter a name, the Selector Name or Alternate Name is used.
c. Select a colour.
d. Select an image. The images are stored in the Image Library. See Image Library on
page 56.
e. Enter a tooltip. This is an optional string that appears if a user hovers over the
Selector in the Label Selection area of the ribbon bar (maximum length 1000). If no
value is chosen, or there is no Tooltip defined for the selected value, then the Tooltip
defined for the parent Selector will be shown.
f. Enter a Portion Marking. This is a text string that allows you to allocate a short form of
the Label Value so that when you wish to mark parts of a Word document or email
message as “Confidential" or "Public", the short form ( or portion marking value) is
inserted instead. For example: [P] indicating that this text may be circulated publicly.
[C] indicating that this text is confidential and must not be circulated publicly. If you
are not using Portion marking in emails or Word, then you can leave this setting
blank. See Portion Mark on page 20 for further details.
g. Enter alternate names if you wish to establish different Marking Formats to encode
the current label value in different ways. For example, you may wish to establish a
Marking Format which displays the selected values in full and use that format in
Headers and Footers; but for Subject Prefix in email messages, you may require

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 72

 Labelling Configurations / Selector Library

shortened forms (for example, Public - > Pub). Up to three “alternate names” for a
value can be defined using these properties. When you configure a Marking Format,
you can use either the Value Name or any configured Alternative name.
h. Click Update.
7. Set the minimum and maximum numbers of values to be selected. Setting a value does
NOT make the selector mandatory; it merely defines the lower bound if at least one value is
selected. A mandatory rule is required to make the selector mandatory.
8. If the user has too many or too few values, then select a message This allows you to
choose which message is displayed to the user if they have chosen either less than
minimum or more than maximum number of values for this selector. You can create a new
user message. See Adding a New Message to the User Message Library on page 57.
9. In the Clearance section, select if a Domain or User must be Cleared for one of
(Permissive) or all (Restrictive ) the selected values. These radio buttons are only available
if Include this selector in clearance and attachment checks is set and only applicable if
Clearance Checks are configured.You can also choose to ignore this selector in clearance,
attachment and policy marking checks.
10. Select the Include this selector in clearance and attachment checks if you want the
selectors to be included in high water mark and clearance checks.
11. Click OK.

Adding a Text Entry Selector

Freeform text selectors do not take part in Clearance checks or high-water mark checks
(LabelDominance); but can be included in Check for Label Change.
Text entry selectors cannot be displayed in the Ribbon Bar.
To add a selector:
1. Select the Selector Library and choose Add a new selector and choose Single selection list.
2. Enter a name for the selector, and, if you are configuring Titus interoperability, enter a Titus
field name - the name that will map the Titus field to a Classifier selector. If this is empty,
then the Classifier selector name is used.
3. Select the Language.
By default, the Selector Library list displays the selector Captions and Tooltips defined for
the Configuration default language. Any Caption or Tooltip shown in the upper pane which
has not had a language specific value defined will be blank. The lower pane will show the
Value Name, Tooltip, Portion, Alternate name /2/3 values defined for that language. If no
specific value has been defined, then a value is derived using the Algorithm defined in
Languages on page 49.
4. Enter a caption. This is the name displayed to the end user. The value may be overridden
by a Caption setting at the Policy level. The value should be short enough to fit into the
ribbon bar area that displays the label selection interface. Check that the effects are
reasonable in all relevant environments (for example, Outlook / OWA / Notes / Office etc.).
If you do not set this explicitly, then the Selector Name is used as the caption.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 73

 Labelling Configurations / Selector Library

5. Enter a tooltip. This is an optional string that appears if a user hovers over the Selector in
the Label Selection area of the ribbon bar (maximum length 1000). If no value is chosen, or
there is no Tooltip defined for the selected value, then the Tooltip defined for the parent
Selector will be shown.
Due to the nature of the environment, some unusual characters within a tooltip

6. Select Allow any text if you want all text included.

7. Select Restrict User Input to allow only certain characters to be entered. Only text indicated
by the subordinate settings is valid (Alphabetic (a regular expression mask of "(([a-zA-
Z]))+" - English only ) / Numeric / Punctuation / Space ). For character sets other than
English, use the Custom Format features. The following characters are always restricted
even if all the subordinate options are checked: ¬"£$%^&*_+={}@~#\|<>.
8. Select Define a custom format using a regular expression if you want only custom text
included. Classifier invokes the Microsoft .NET Framework Regex object to perform the
checks (see http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/az24scfc(v=vs.90).aspx for more
details).
9. If the user enters invalid text, then select a message to display. In many cases Classifier
inhibits user input of 'invalid' text, but circumstances will arise where this is not possible (for
example, forwarding a message containing invalid value for this selector). You can create a
new user message. See Adding a New Message to the User Message Library on page 57.
10. Select the Include this selector in clearance, attachment and policy marking checks if you
want the selectors to be included in high water mark and clearance checks.
11. Click OK.

Adding a Date Picker Selector

Date picker selectors take no part in Clearance checking, but are included in high-water mark
checks (Label Dominance), and Check for Label Change.
Date picker selectors cannot be displayed in the Ribbon Bar.
To add a selector:
1. Select the Selector Library and choose Add a new selector and choose Single selection list.
2. Enter a name for the selector, and, if you are configuring Titus interoperability, enter a Titus
field name - the name that will map the Titus field to a Classifier selector. If this is empty,
then the Classifier selector name is used.
3. Select the Language.
By default, the Selector Library list displays the selector Captions and Tooltips defined for
the Configuration default language. Any Caption or Tooltip shown in the upper pane which
has not had a language specific value defined will be blank. The lower pane will show the
Value Name, Tooltip, Portion, Alternate name /2/3 values defined for that language. If no
specific value has been defined, then a value is derived using the Algorithm defined in
Languages on page 49.
4. Enter a caption. This is the name displayed to the end user. The value may be overridden
by a Caption setting at the Policy level. The value should be short enough to fit into the
ribbon bar area that displays the label selection interface. Check that the effects are

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 74

 Labelling Configurations / Selector Library

reasonable in all relevant environments (for example, Outlook / OWA / Notes / Office etc.).
If you do not set this explicitly, then the Selector Name is used as the caption.
5. Enter a tooltip. This is an optional string that appears if a user hovers over the Selector in
the Label Selection area of the ribbon bar (maximum length 1000). If no value is chosen, or
there is no Tooltip defined for the selected value, then the Tooltip defined for the parent
Selector will be shown.
Due to the nature of the environment, some unusual characters within a tooltip

6. Select Allow any date if you want all dates included.

7. Select Restrict to a time period if the dates available for selectionwill be limited according to
the time period allowed. Select a number of days/weeks/months/years from the current
date either in the future or the past.
8. If the user enters an invalid date, then select a message to display. In many cases
Classifier inhibits user input of 'invalid' dates, but circumstances will arise where this is not
possible (for example, forwarding a message containing invalid value for this selector). You
can create a new user message. See Adding a New Message to the User Message Library
on page 57.
9. Click OK.

Adding a Date Offset List Selector

Date offset selectors take no part in Clearance checking, but are included in high-water mark
checks (see Label Dominance on page 69), and Check for Label Change . Date offset list
selectors can be displayed in the Ribbon Bar.
To add a selector:
1. Select the Selector Library and choose Add a new selector and choose Single selection list.
2. Enter a name for the selector, and, if you are configuring Titus interoperability, enter a Titus
field name - the name that will map the Titus field to a Classifier selector. If this is empty,
then the Classifier selector name is used.
3. Select the Language.
By default, the Selector Library list displays the selector Captions and Tooltips defined for
the Configuration default language. Any Caption or Tooltip shown in the upper pane which
has not had a language specific value defined will be blank. The lower pane will show the
Value Name, Tooltip, Portion, Alternate name /2/3 values defined for that language. If no
specific value has been defined, then a value is derived using the Algorithm defined in
Languages on page 49.
4. Enter a caption. This is the name displayed to the end user. The value may be overridden
by a Caption setting at the Policy level. The value should be short enough to fit into the
ribbon bar area that displays the label selection interface. Check that the effects are
reasonable in all relevant environments (for example, Outlook / OWA / Notes / Office etc.).
If you do not set this explicitly, then the Selector Name is used as the caption.
5. Enter a tooltip. This is an optional string that appears if a user hovers over the Selector in
the Label Selection area of the ribbon bar (maximum length 1000). If no value is chosen, or
there is no Tooltip defined for the selected value, then the Tooltip defined for the parent
Selector will be shown.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 75

 Labelling Configurations / Selector Library

Due to the nature of the environment, some unusual characters within a tooltip

6. Click New to insert a row.

a. Enter a value name. The name must be unique for this selector and in the
Configuration to avoid confusion and miss parsing of text markings.
b. If you are configuring Titus interoperability, enter a Titus Field Value Name. If you do
not enter a name, the Selector Name or Alternate Name is used.
c. Select a colour.
d. Enter a number for the number of days / weeks / months / years to be added to the
current date to produce the actual date value to be stored in any applied Markings.
e. Enter a Period to define how the number is to be used to provide the offset to today's
date to produce a marking value.
f. Enter a tooltip. This is an optional string that appears if a user hovers over the
Selector in the Label Selection area of the ribbon bar (maximum length 1000). If no
value is chosen, or there is no Tooltip defined for the selected value, then the Tooltip
defined for the parent Selector will be shown.
g. Enter a Portion Marking. This is a text string that allows you to allocate a short form of
the Label Value so that when you wish to mark parts of a Word document or email
message as “Confidential" or "Public", the short form (or portion marking value) is
inserted instead. For example: [P] indicating that this text may be circulated publicly.
[C] indicating that this text is confidential and must not be circulated publicly. If you
are not using Portion marking in emails or Word, then you can leave this setting
blank. See Portion Mark on page 20 for further details.
h. Enter alternate names if you wish to establish different Marking Formats to encode
the current label value in different ways. For example, you may wish to establish a
Marking Format which displays the selected values in full and use that format in
Headers and Footers; but for Subject Prefix in email messages, you may require
shortened forms (for example, Public - > Pub). Up to three “alternate names” for a
value can be defined using these properties. When you configure a Marking Format,
you can use either the Value Name or any configured Alternative name.
i. Click Update.
7. Click OK.

Editing Selectors
To edit a selector:
1. Choose a selector in the Selector Library.
2. Click Edit Selector.
3. Make necessary changes and click OK.

Changing the Order of Selectors

The order values appear in the order in which they are displayed to end users. You can change
the order of Selectors in the Selector Libary.
To change the order:

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 76

 Labelling Configurations / Selector Library

1. Choose a selector in the Selector Library.

2. Click Move Up or Move Down.

Making Selectors Obsolete/Restoring Selectors

Over time you may find that some Selector values fall into disuse and should no longer be applied
to new objects. Classifier accommodates this circumstance by allowing you to designate Selector
values and/or Selectors (all values) as Obsolete.
Designating a Selector or Selector Value as obsolete means that it can still be recognised and
displayed when it is found in an existing object (for example, in the summary label for a document
labelled with an Obsolete value); but the user is not allowed to select that selector/value when
creating a new object.
For example, if you forward or reply to an existing email that contains an obsolete Selector Value,
the obsolete value is dropped from the new email message, and replaced by the default value (if
any) for that selector. So obsolete selectors/selector values do not contribute to label downgrade
checks.
Saving a document containing an Obsolete selector value is treated as a new document, and any
Obsolete selector values are replaced by default values.
Obsolete Selectors take no part in Rules because Rules only apply to new objects (which cannot
include Obsolete values). Whilst there is at least one Selector value active in a policy, the Selector
can contribute to Rules.
You cannot obsolete a Selector until all Rules referencing the Selector have been deleted or
modified to avoid any reference to that Selector.

NOTE: If you have a Selector that is not Active or Retained in the current Policy AND is not
marked as Obsolete in the Selector Library, it operates as though it was actually marked as
Obsolete - that is, displayed if found, but not propagated.

To make a selector obsolete:

1. Select the relevant selector.
2. Click Obsolete.
3. Click Yes to confirm the obsolete action.
To restore an obsolete Selector:
1. Select the relevant (obsolete) selector.
2. Choose Restore.
3. Click Yes to confirm the Restore action.

NOTE: You cannot make a selector obsolete until all Rules referencing the Selector have been
deleted or modified to avoid any reference to that Selector. Warning appear if there are
outstanding rules when you attempt an Obsolete action, and the action is not allowed.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 77

 Labelling Configurations / Marking Library

Deleting a Selector
Deleting a Selector should only be used if you are sure that there are no existing documents or
emails that use that selector. It may be more appropriate to mark the selector as Obsolete.
Deleting a Selector removes all associated Values. You cannot delete a selector if it is still in use
in a policy.
To delete a selector:
1. Select Selector Library and choose the relevant Selector.
2. Select Delete.
3. Click Yes to confirm the Delete action.
4. If the selector is still in use in a policy, you are prompted and the action is disallowed.

Marking Library
A Marking Format defines how selected labels are displayed to end users. Each Marking Format
defines how to construct a Marking using the features below in the order defined by the Marking
Format:
l Fixed Text
l Label Elements from the selected label (Labelling Configuration, Policy and Selector
Values).
l Hyperlinks
l Alternative Selector Value Names available as rendering qualifier to Label Element choice.
l Environment / Document Properties.
l Directory Attributes
l Rich text formatting.

NOTE: Saving a document as another type (for example, Word --> TXT or EXCEL --> CSV)
may lose the Classifier label and marking information.

When configuring a Marking Format, keep in mind the following:

l Marking formats that are to be used for FLOT, LLOT, Portion Marking, or email message
Subject markings should include clear delimiters around the entire marking so that
Classifier can 'find' the markings. For example: [{Configuration Name} {Classification}]. See
Recognising and Parsing Label Markings for further information.
l Using <whitespace> to separate marking elements can lead to unexpected issues when
parsing labels. Additional control to avoid these issues is provided for Selector Elements
through the Text Display and Marking Selector options.
l You can define Marking Formats that span multiple lines. If you insert a 'newline' using
SHIFT+Enter, the Marking will NOT appear correctly in Microsoft Office Headers or Footers
(it will be correct in Outlook FLOT/LLOT). Use Enter (rather than SHIFT + Enter) to insert
the 'newline' and the Marking will appear correctly.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 78

 Labelling Configurations / Marking Library

Adding a New Marking Format

To add a new marking format:
1. Select the Marking Library node and select Add a new marking format.
2. Enter a name for the Marking Format.
3. Select the Use selector colour values checkbox, if you want the colour value associated
with a Selector value to be used by the Marking Format even in a sequence that has the
font colour set. Clear this checkbox so that any colour associated with a selector value is
ignored when producing the Marking value.
4. Select the Use plain text style option if you want your text to have formatting. By default, the
text generated from a marking format will always include formatting settings - even if you
have not set any explicitly. A plain text variant is inserted in contexts that do not support
formatting. This setting influences the operation of Add a textbox on the header / footer
(Word only).
NOTE: In some circumstances, the formatting defined for inserted marking may interfere
with formatting your site. This option allows you to direct Classifier to use the plain text
marking variant even though the context supports formatting. For Word and Excel, any
pre-defined formatting in headers/footers is removed. For PowerPoint, any pre-defined
formatting is applied to the plain text variant of the marking. If you enable this option,
Preview a Marking Format will only show the plain text version. Any formatting you
have specified in the marking format definition is remembered regardless of whether
this option is selected or not. Plain text style is not supported in Mail Add-In.

5. If you want to add a Selector element, go to Adding a Selector on page 80.

6. If you want to add a Hyperlink, go to Adding a Hyperlink on page 80.
7. If you want to add an Environment Property, go to Adding an Environment Property on page
81.
8. If you want to add a Document Property, go to Adding a Document or Email Property on
page 81.
9. If you want to add a Directory Attribute, go to Adding a Directory Attribute on page 82.
10. Set the font and font styles.
NOTE:
Using the Marking Format / Font options, you can include Rich Text Formatting, Font,
Colour, Size, Style (Bold, Italics and Underline). If you apply additional formatting to a
header or footer it will be retained even if you subsequently select different label
values. For example, select the header created when you select label values, and then
apply double strike-through; change the label and the strike-through remains. A
Marking Format that includes Rich Text features can be applied to a label location
which does not support such features. In this case, the plain text version of the Marking
Format will be applied.

11. Set the text alignment.

12. If you want to see a preview of your Marking formats, click Preview.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 79

 Labelling Configurations / Marking Library

NOTE: Not all elements are available in all environments. Check the actual Marking that
appears in all circumstances, especially if it is assigned as the Custom Format for
Summary Markings.

13. If you are happy with your configuration, click OK.

The appearance of any marking should be checked in the target applications to ensure that
the end effect is suitable. For example, Word Watermarks apply auto-sizing and using a
'long' Marking Format may be ineffective as some applications apply limits to the size of
headers/footers (including formatting control information). If limits are exceeded, Classifier
first removes formatting information before truncating the text.
\/:*?”<>| should not be used in a Marking Format either in Selector value names or as part
of the Marking Format text supplied. Using these characters may result in unexpected
presentation effects in the current or future versions of Classifier, For example all formatting
is lost (colour, font, and alignment) (Office applications), The Selector value does not
appear in the applied marking (Outlook), and run-time errors.

Adding a Selector
If Text / Date picker / Date offset selectors are to be included a Marking format that will be used to
parse a text label (for example, Externally defined label, FLOT, LLOT, Portion Marking or
Subject), Prefix and Suffix ( Marking Selector options) must be specified so that Classifier can find
the start and end of the string which contains the associated selector value.
1. Click Selector.
2. Select a label.
3. Select a text display to control how the selector appears in the marking. For non-date type
selectors, the list will include Portion Marking or Alternate name / Alternate 2/ Alternate 3
values when you configured the Selector. The ID entry represents the unique identifier
allocated to the Selector. Date type selectors can be Long / Short date values represent the
formats defined for the system under Control Panel / Regional Settings. The default is Long
date. Selecting Custom Date will make the Custom Date Format field available allowing you
to enter text formatting control as described in: http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-
us/library/system.globalization.datetimeformatinfo(v=VS.80).aspx. For example, you could
specify 'dddd, dd MMMM yyyy' to get 'Tuesday, 23 October 2012'. The selector token in the
Marking Format is annotated accordingly (If Long Date is chosen, it is not shown as it is the
default). Date items appear in local time.
4. Define prefix and suffix text and indicate that position they will appear in the marking. They
only appear in the marking if the selector has a value selected. This feature can be used to
remove redundant <whitespace> in markings and to facilitate parsing of (externally
defined) label values in Label Locations.
NOTE: Prefix and Suffix must be defined for Text / Date picker / Date offset selectors
included in a Marking format that will be used to parse a text label (for example,
Externally defined label, FLOT, LLOT, Portion Marking or Subject).

5. Click OK.

Adding a Hyperlink

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 80

 Labelling Configurations / Marking Library

It is recommended that you only insert Hyperlinks in Marking Formats intended for use in Email
FLOT and LLOT rules. You can use a Marking Format containing a Hyperlink elsewhere (for
example, a Word Header), but the link may not operate correctly.
1. Click Hyperlink.
2. Enter text to display in the marking.
3. Enter the URL address.
4. Click OK.

Adding an Environment Property

Some Environment values may not be available in all environments (for example, OWA Classifier,
Summary Marking - any item not available is left blank). It is important to check the actual Marking
that appears in all circumstances where a Marking Format is used.
To insert an Environment Property into a format:
1. Select Environment Property.
2. Select a property from the Family list.
3. Select a Property Name. The Property Name depends on your selection from the Family
list.
4. If you select DateTime, enter a custom date.
5. In the Sample field, check the formatting of your selections.

Adding a Document or Email Property

Not all the properties listed are supported by all applications. Properties supported by an
application can be found in your documents' or emails' properties.
Document or email properties may not be available in all environments. It is important to check
the actual Marking that appears in all circumstances - especially if it is assigned as the Custom
Format for Summary Markings.
Email properties is not supported in Mail Add-in.
To insert a Document or Email Property into a format:
1. Select Document Property.
2. Select a Property Type - Document or Email
NOTE: The supported properties are grouped for convenience, but Classifier just checks
the current object for a property with that name. Selecting Subject from the list of
document properties will be meaningful if the marking format is applied to an email and
vice versa.

3. Select the required Property Name.

4. Click OK.

NOTE: Adding an email property to include, for example, Ccrecipients, inserts a place holder
into the Marking Format.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 81

 Labelling Configurations / Content Library

Adding a Directory Attribute

To insert a Directory Attribute into a format:
1. Select Directory Attribute.
2. Select the Family Type you require (Computer or User).
3. Select an Attribute Name.
4. Click OK.

Copying a Marking Format

You can use an existing Marking Format as the basis for a new Marking Format.
1. Select the Marking Library node and select the relevant Marking Format entry.
2. Select Copy. This adds a new entry to the list called <Marking Format Name> 1.
3. Double-click the copied Marking Format to open it and make any changes.
4. Click OK.

Deleting a Marking Format

To delete any marking format:
1. Select the Marking Library node and select the relevant Marking Format entry.
2. Choose Delete.
3. Click Yes to confirm the deletion.
A warning dialog is displayed if you attempt to delete a Marking Format that is in use in the
configuration

Content Library
The Content Library consists of (Search) Expressions which can be associated with Matchers.
Each Expression has a unique (Expression) Name, and an 'expression' defining the how content
will be checked. See Defining Expressions on page 83 for further details.

NOTE: Expressions can also be referenced from Conditions.

The Configuration can define that checks should be applied when sending an email message or
saving / printing a document to ensure that the content (Subject/ Body/ attachments / document)
does not contain certain 'words'. The attachment types processed during email content checking
are listed in Supported Content Checking File Types on page 238.
The operation of the search performed can be modified using a registry key setting described
under Matching algorithm control.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 82

 Labelling Configurations / Content Library

NOTE:
Content Checking is supported by Email Classifier and Office Classifier (Word, Excel, and
PowerPoint). Content checking of RMS protected items never yields a match as the content is
not accessible.

Matchers
A Matcher defines an association between the content to be matched (as defined by the
associated Expressions) and a set of selector values, such that the identified content may be
"permitted" to be defined by the selector values, or this content is never permitted regardless of
the label value.
You can specify the Matchers relevant to the check, and the action to be taken if matched. The
action defined by a Content Rule is only triggered if the associated Matcher fails; that is, an
Expression matches some content, and either the content is never allowed or the current label is
not in the permitted set of selector values. The Rule also allows you to control the level of detail
shown to the user when the Rule action is triggered.
A description of the end user experience of Content checking can be found in Content Checking
User view .
Each Content Matcher has a unique Name and Description and should have one or more
Expressions associated, along with permitted Selector values (a portion of the label space) for
which the matching content is allowed. If a message contains content matching an Expression in
the Matcher, then the message label must be in the defined label set for the content check to
pass.
Each Content Checker has a Match Type which is either ANY (the associated content will be
considered as identified if ANY of the Expressions defined matches), or ALL (the associated
content will be considered as identified only if ALL the Expressions match).
For more information, see Adding a Matcher on page 86

Defining Expressions
Each Expression defines a set of values which are to be compared against the contents of a
message, and the way in which the comparison is to be performed.
The comparison operates by comparing 'words', so if your expression is "apple and pie", applepie
is one word and will not match.
An expression might be a simple (case insensitive) comparison, or more complex.
l Regular Expressions need to be enclosed in “##” … for example, a regular expression to
search for two numbers together would have to be entered as “##[0-9][0-9]”, therefore, if
your phrase to look for was ‘banana’ and 'two numbers together', the search phrase to enter
would be: banana AND“##[0-9][0-9]”
l Regular Expressions must match a single whole word. For example, a search for
"##app.*ie" would not find "apple pie".

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 83

 Labelling Configurations / Content Library

l Characters that are not indexed as letters are not searchable even using regular
expressions
l The search index does not store information about line breaks. Searches that include
beginning / end of line regular expression criteria (^ and $) will not work.
l Care must be exercised including "And" or "Or" as text in an expression as these are
'operators' and must be enclosed in quotes if you want them treated as text. For example,
an expression open and closed would match if the message contained both
"open"and"closed" within it. An expression open "and" closed would only match if the string
"open and closed" appeared in the document, a similar effect can be achieved by enclosing
the whole expression string in quotes - "open and closed".
l Noise words such as "if" and "the" are ignored during comparisons.
l The following should not be used as "text" when defining expressions: (comma), (period),?,
=, *, %, #, ~, &, ~~, ##, contains, and, or, +, -, [, ], /, \ (esc)
Examples:

Expression Meaning
banana Will match if "banana" appears somewhere in the content.
apple and pear Will match if both "apple" and "pear" appear in the content.
apple and not pear Will match if "apple" appears but "pear" does not appear in the
content.
(apple and pear) or Will match if at least one of the combinations (apple and pear) or
(banana and (banana + orange) appears in the content.
orange)
appl* Wildcard expression that matches apple, or application.
appl? Wildcard expression that will match on apple, but not apples.
"apple pie" Will match if the content contains the phrase "apple pie".
date(jan 15 2012) Matches dates in any of the date formats defined below.
date(jan 10 2012 Matches dates in the defined range (first half of 2012).
to jun 30 2012)
Date formats: The following are all recognised as the same date
January 15, 2013
15 Jan 13
2013/01/15
1/15/13
1-15-13
The fifteenth of January two thousand thirteen

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 84

 Labelling Configurations / Content Library

Expression Meaning
mail Matches email addresses including wild-card * or ? inside the ().
(*@abcxyz.com)
creditcard(*) Matches credit cards in any of the formats below. Matches
creditcard(1234*) credit cards starting with n234.
The following are recognised as credit card number formats:
l n234-5678-1234-5678
l n234567812345678
l n2345678 1234 5678
Numerical tests, used by the credit card issuers for card validity,
are used to exclude sequences of numbers that are not credit card
numbers. However, these tests are not perfect and the credit card
number recognition feature may pick up some numbers that are
not really credit card numbers. The examples above are not valid
credit card numbers and will not trigger the checks - valid credit
card numbers must start (n) with 3,4,5 or 6
=== == Matches a sequence of 3 digits, a space and 2 digits.
mail Matches a hotmail email address.
(*@hotmail.com)
"##[a-z]{2}[0-9]{4} Regular expression to detect an index number of the form
[a-z]" xxnnnnx.
"##[a-ceghj-pr-tw- UK National Insurance with spaces
z]{1}[a-ceghj-npr-
tw-z]{1}" "##[0-9]
{2}" "##[0-9]{2}"
"##[0-9]{2}" "##[a-
d]{1}"
"##[a-ceghj-pr-tw- UK National Insurance number with no spaces.
z]{1}[a-ceghj-npr-
tw-z]{1}[0-9]{6} [a-
d]{1}"
"##([a-z]{2}[9]{3}| Matches NON99604079T9900 | NOONE355144BA900 |
[a-z]{3}[9]{2}|[a-z] NONE9701010RW900 but not ABC12343434F9900 |
{4}[9]{1}|[a-z]{5}) NOONE355123ASDAS | NOONE9121234UOUOO
[0-9]{6}([a-z]{1}[9]
{1}|[a-z]{2})[0-9]
{3}"

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 85

 Labelling Configurations / Content Library

Adding a New Expression

To add a new expression:
1. Select the Content Library and select the Expressions tab.
2. Select Add a new expression.
3. Supply the Name and Expression.
4. Click OK.
The expressions established can be used when defining Content Matchers and when
defining Conditions.

Changing the Expression

To change the expression:
1. Select the expression and select Properties.
2. Make the necessary changes.
3. Click OK.

Deleting an Expression
You cannot delete an Expression that would result in a Matcher with no associated expressions.
To delete an Expression from a Matcher:
1. Select an Expression and click Delete.
2. Click Yes to confirm deletion.

Copying an Expression
You can use existing Expressions defined under one Matcher as the basis for a new Expression
for use in the current or another Matcher using a Copy and Paste sequence.
To copy an expression:
1. Select an Expression and click Copy.
A new entry name <Expression Name> 1 appears in the list.
2. Select the copied expression and click Properties.
3. Make the necessary changes.
4. Click OK.

Adding a Matcher
You can select a name for the content matcher and match any or all expressions within the
matcher.

NOTE: Content Checking is supported by Email Classifier and Office Classifier (Word and
Excel).

To add a new matcher:

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 86

 Labelling Configurations / Content Library

1. Select the Content Library and select the Matchers tab.

2. Select Add a new matcher.
3. Enter a Name. This Name is used when defining Content Checking rules.
4. Enter a description - this is for information purposes only.
5. Select Match any or Match all. This indicates if the expressions match any or all for the
Content Checking rule to consider the content as matching (and trigger the defined action).
6. Click Next.
7. Select an expressions for the content matcher, and click Next.
8. Choose label values that will allow or block content when used with the Content Check rule.
The content is not allowed setting means that the defined content is not permitted
regardless of the label value. Selecting this will grey out the label selection tree.
9. Select one or all of the selector values.
10. Click Finish. The newly created Matcher will appear in the summary.

Modifying a Matcher
To view and change the properties of a Matcher:
1. Select the Matcher and click Properties.
2. Make the necessary changes.
3. Click OK.

Deleting a Matcher
To delete a Matcher from the Content Library:
1. Select the Matcher and click Delete.
2. Click Yes to confirm deletion.
A warning dialog will be displayed if you attempt to delete a Matcher that is in use in a Rule.

Content Checking User View

When content checking is performed, Classifier treats each of the Message Subject, Message
Body and each attachment as a separate item, and performs checks using the Expressions
associated with Content Matchers selected for the rule. A progress bar is displayed as the content
is being inspected. (The registry setting DisplayContentCheckProgress can be used to disable
this progress bar).
If a Matcher matches in any of the items (Subject, Body or attachment), a Content Check
exception is flagged, and the current message label is checked against the Label criteria defined
for the associated Group. If the current label is covered by the label criteria, then the check
succeeds and the user is unaware.
Further control over the matching algorithm is available as described in Matching algorithm
control .

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 87

 Labelling Configurations / Content Library

l If the current label is NOT in the defined label criteria, then the Warn/Prevent action is
activated.
l If Warn or Prevent is set (as opposed to Audit only) then the user will be prompted to take
an action.

To check the policy content:

1. If the Show highlighted content matches option is checked in the rule, then the user also
canscan the actual matches by clicking View.
2. Clicking View will show more information. Select each location and the item contents
(including meta- data such as header / footer values) appears with matches highlighted.
3. Next / Previous allow you to move up and down the selected location (attachment /
document / body).

NOTE: Highlighting matches in PDF files is only possible if Adobe Reader / Adobe Acrobat if
Enable search highlights from external server is selected.

Matching Algorithm Control

By default, the matcher checks various aspects of the message (for example, Subject, Body, and
attachments), is case insensitive, and includes document properties.
Two general settings are provided that allow further control:
l Content checking - case sensitive .
l Content checking - skip document properties
More aspects of the algorithm can be controlled by setting an enumeration registry entry in one of
the following locations (which are searched in the order shown):
l HKEY_CURRENT_USER\SOFTWARE\Policies\Boldon James\Classifier
l HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Policies\Boldon James\Classifier
l HKEY_CURRENT_USER\SOFTWARE\Boldon James\Classifier
l HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Boldon James\Classifier
l HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Boldon James\Classifier (if
running 32-bit Classifier applications on a 64-bit machine)

Entry \ContentCheckFieldFlags
Only applicable if Classifier Content Checking is enabled.
Type REG_DWORD

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 88

 Labelling Configurations / Condition Library

Entry \ContentCheckFieldFlags
Only applicable if Classifier Content Checking is enabled.
Data Not configured - The default operation applies.
Any value defined will modify the search algorithm according to the bit-wise
values described in the dtsearch FieldFlags support web page (for example,
s earch for "dtsearch support FieldFlags").
For example :
Value = 3 (1 + 2) would ignore the filename (1) and ignore document
properties (2). The setting will apply to all Content Check rules performed by
a Classifier application.

Condition Library
The Configuration can define conditions that can be associated with Rules so that the Rule is only
triggered if the Conditions are met. For example, a rule that applied a LLOT only if an external
recipient was defined. Prerequisite conditions are associated with a rule as part of Rules Wizard
operation.
Each Condition defined includes one or more compatible (Document or Message) Condition type
definitions. See Supported Condition Types on page 91.
When defining a rule, you can indicate whether the rule applies Condition free or subject to one or
more Conditions.
Scenarios:
1. A message containing recipients from both domains A and B should have X-header AB
applied. This can be achieved with a single condition (Message Recipient Domain condition
with two entries) and a single rule.
2. A message with a recipient from domain A or domain B should have an x-header A or B
added. This will require two conditions one for each domain, and two rules. The fact that in
this case there may be duplicate rules (at the same point in the rule tree) is handled by the
fact that the rule highest up the tree takes precedence (See Move rule up / down).

Add a New Condition

To add a new condition:
1. Select the Condition Library, and select Add a new condition.
The Add Condition dialog opens.
2. Enter a Name and Description if required.
3. Select Add a new condition type.
The New Condition Type dialog opens.
4. Select a condition type and select an operator to combine condition entries.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 89

 Labelling Configurations / Condition Library

If you combine entries with the AND operator, then all conditions must be true.
Alternatively, if you combine entries with the OR operator, then one or more conditions
must be true.
5. Click Add a new condition entry.
The New Condition Entry dialog opens.
a. Select a name and a check, and enter a value.
b. Click OK to return to the New Condition Type dialog.
6. Click OK to return to the Add Condition dialog.
7. Click OK.

Editing Conditions
To view or change the properties of a Condition:
1. Select a Condition and select Properties.
2. Edit the condition as necessary.
3. Click OK.

Editing Condition Types

To edit condition types:
1. Select a Condition and select Properties.
2. Click Edit next to a condition type.
3. Edit the condition type as necessary. You can click Edit or Delete next to the Condition
Entry
4. Click OK.
5. Click OK again.

Copying Conditions
To copy a Condition to use as a base for another condition:
1. Select a Condition and select Copy. The new condition has the name <Condition Name> 1.
2. Select the copied Condition and select Properties.
3. Make the necessary changes.
4. Click OK.

Deleting Conditions
To delete a Condition:
1. Select a Condition and select Delete.
2. Click Yes to confirm the deletion.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 90

 Labelling Configurations / Condition Library

Deleting Condition Types

To delete condition types:
1. Select a Condition and select Properties.
2. Click Delete next to a condition type.

Changing the Order of Condition Types

You can change the order of condition types to change its order of execution.
1. Select a Condition and select Properties.
2. Click the Condition Type button.

Supported Condition Types

Each Condition type supports one or more Condition entries with specific options as per the table
below. Expression matching in the options below is case insensitive.

Condition Options Supported

Types
Active Directory If Computer Active Directory attribute: Description, DN, Location,
Attribute Values Name, Operating system, Operating system service pack and
of Computer Operating system version - [Contains value] [Does not contain
value] [has value] [has value matching regular expression] [has a
value not matching regular expression]. See also Cache Active
Directory attributes on start-up.
Active Directory If User attribute: Common name, Country/Region, Company,
Attribute Values Department, Description, Display name, Printable display name,
of User DN, Extenstion Attribute 1 - 10, Fax number, Given name, Home
telephone number, Telephone notes, Initials, City, email address,
SMTP address, Mobile telephone number, User culture, Pager
number, Office, Zip/Postal Code, Proxy Address, Account,
Surname, State/Province, Street, Telephone number, Title, URL -
[Contains value] [Does not contain value] [has value] [has value
matching regular expression] [has a value not matching regular
expression].
Active Directory [Specifically, the logged on user or in the case of OWA the
Group Originator]
Membership of
User User is/ is not a member of the specified Active Directory group or
an Active Directory group matching the supplied regular expression.
Date Select date from a calendar
Day of the Week Values are Monday through Sunday

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 91

 Labelling Configurations / Condition Library

Condition Options Supported

Types
Document Combinations that Do or Do Not match existing Expressions defined
Content in the Content Library. For example: Expressions finds a match with
Document (Expression) ApplesANDExpression does not find a match with
Content Count (Expression) Bananas.
(Email, Word,
Excel and
PowerPoint) and
Data
Classification
Service –Index
Mode)
Document l Document (Custom) PropertyName.
Custom l Check (appropriate value or existence check type).
Property l Value if applicable.
Document Event Event processed [is] [is not] with Event type Saving / Printing /Label
Fired (All Office selection
applications)
Document has Document [does] [does not] have Different Odd & even page
Different Odd header/footers set.
and even page
header/footers
(Word and
Excel)
Document is Document [is] [is not] marked as final.
marked as final
(Word and
Excel)
Document If document has these properties: Author, Category, Comments,
Property Company, Filename, Keywords, Manager, Status, Subject, Title
[Contains value] [Does not contain value] [has value] [does not have
value] [has a value that matches regEx] [has a value that does not
match regEx]
Document Document [is] [is not] protected with protection type Comments /
Protection Type FillingInForms / NoChanges / TrackedChanges.
(Word only)

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 92

 Labelling Configurations / Condition Library

Condition Options Supported

Types
Document Document template name [equals] [does not equal] [contains] [does
Template Name not contain] [matches regular expression] [does not match regular
(Word only) expression]
Dynamic A named '(Offline) Address Book' property for a recipient - [has
Clearance User value] [does not have value] [contains] [does not contain] [matches
Properties regular expression] [does not match regular expression].
Not all attributes in the Active Directory are available via an (Offline)
Address Book. See Dynamic Clearance Conditions for further
information.
Host Product Host Product Locale [is] [is not] Language.
Locale
IP Address Computer's IP address [is] [is not] in Network (values IP address
and Subnet mask)
Item Has a Item [has] [does not have] a label.
Label
Mac Address Computer [has] [does not have Mac address] [matches regular
expression] [does not match regular expression].
Message Body Has Message Body [that equals value] [that does not equal value]
[that starts with value] [that ends with value] [that contains value]
[that does not contain value] [with value that matches RegEx] [that
does not match RegEx]
Message Body Has message body length that [equals][does not equal][which is less
Length than][which is greater than] value.

NOTE: HTML tags are included in the message body length

character count.

Message Class Message Class [equals] [does not equal] [starts with] [ends with]
[contains] [does not contain]
Message Combinations (AND or OR) that Do or Do Not match existing
Content Expressions defined in the Content Library . For example:
Message
Content Count Expressions finds a match with (Expression) ApplesANDExpression
does not find a match with (Expression) Bananas .

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 93

 Labelling Configurations / Condition Library

Condition Options Supported

Types
Message Has Message [has] [does not] have attachment with an extension that
Attachment with equals Value.
Extension
Embedded images may be excluded using the Include embedded
images when performing attachment checks setting.
Message Has Attachment name [equals ] [ starts with ] [ends with] [contains]
Attachment with [matches regular expression]
Name
Does not have attachment name that [equals] [contains] [matches
regular expression].
Embedded images may be excluded using the Include embedded
images when performing attachment checks setting
Message Has Message Contains [more attachments] [less attachments]
Number of [Attachments present] [No attachments].
Attachments
Embedded images may be excluded using the Include embedded
images when performing attachment checks setting
Message Has Message [has] [does not] have Unclassified attachments.
Unclassified
Attachments Embedded images may be excluded using the Include embedded
images when performing attachment checks setting
Message Originator attribute value [contains], [does not contain], [has], [does
Originator not have], [has a value that matches RegEx], [has a value that does
Attribute Values not match RegEx].
This condition only applies if the “Use From field for Originator
Clearance” is enabled. It obtains information from the Originator’s
address book, not from Active Directory.
Message Originator domain [equals] [does not equal] [starts with] [ends with]
Originator [contains] [does not contain].
Domain
Message Originator email address [equals] [does not equal].
Originator Email
Address
Message Check for recipient whose address book properties match the
Recipient specified value
Attribute values

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 94

 Labelling Configurations / Condition Library

Condition Options Supported

Types
Message Contains [more recipients than] [fewer recipients than] Recipient
Recipient Count count (Distribution lists are not expanded when this check is
performed.
Message [Contains recipients in domain] [Does not contain recipients in
Recipient domain] - checks that the address contains the supplied string - case
Domain insensitive
Message Message [contains recipients that are] [does not contain recipients
Recipient that are] Internal / External
Location
Message Message [contains recipient] [does not contain recipient] [There is
Recipient one recipient and it is] [There is one recipient and it is not]. Recipient
Presence address (an exact match is performed - case insensitive)
Message Response message [contains][does not contain] new recipients.
Response Has
New Recipients
Message Response message [has this number][has less than this number]
Response Has [has greater than this number] of new recipients.
Number of New
Recipients
Message Message [is] [is not] of type Reply / ReplyToAll / Forward
Response Type
Message Has message subject that [equals value][does not equal value][that
Subject starts with value][that ends with value][that contains value][that does
not contain value][with value that matches RegEx][that does not
match RegEx]
Message Has message subject length that [equals][does not equal][which is
Subject Length less than][which is greater than] value.
Message Total Has total attachments size that [equals][which is less than][which is
Attachment Size greater than] value.
Message Type Message Type [equals] [does not equal] Message / Meeting / Task.
OS Locale Operating system locale [is][is not] language.
Product Type Running application is or is not one of the Classifier supported
products (Outlook, Word, Excel, PowerPoint, Project or Visio).
Time Time is [after][before]

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 95

 Labelling Configurations / Question Library

List of Active Directory attributes supported by

Active Directory Attribute Values of User
Common Name, Country/Region, Company, Department, Description, Display Name, Printable
display name, DN, Extension attribute 1 to 15, Fax number, given name, Home telephone
number, Telephone notes, Initials, City, email address, SMTP address, Mobile telephone number,
User culture, Pager number, Office, Zip/Postal Code, Proxy address, Account, Surname, Street,
Telephone number, Title and URL.

Data Classification Service Specific Conditions

Condition Type Options Supported
File Attributes [Contains] [Does not contain]
File Creation Date [Is][Is not] [Is after] [Is before]
File Custom Data [Contains value] [Does not contain value] [Has value] [Does not
- only applies to
Import Mode [have value] [Matches RegEx][Does not match RegEx]
File Extension [Contains value] [Does not contain value] [Has value] [Does not
have value] [Matches RegEx][Does not match RegEx]
File Name [Contains value] [Does not contain value] [Has value] [Does not
have value] [Matches RegEx][Does not match RegEx]
File Owner [Is][Is not] [Contains] [Does not contain] [Matches Regex] [Does
not match RegEx]
File Path [Is][Is not] [Contains] [Does not contain] [Matches Regex] [Does
not match RegEx]
File Size [Is][Is Greater than] [Is Less than]
File Type [Is][Is not]
Last Accessed [Is][Is not] [Is after] [Is before]
Last Modified [Is][Is not] [Is after] [Is before]

Question Library
The Question Library is a repository that stores questions and answers that are used to create
Decision Trees for various scenarios. From these questions and answers, the Decision Tree
guides the user to select which label to apply.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 96

 Labelling Configurations / Question Library

For information on configuring the Decision Tree in a policy, see Configuring the Decision Tree
on page 146
This Question Library that is located with the other libraries and available to the configured
policies.

NOTE:
There will be language variations when the admin tool’s Allow multiple languages option is
enabled. This feature will only support plain text.

Adding a Question and Answer

To add a question and answer:
1. Select the Question Library node, and select Add a new question.
2. Enter a name that refers to the questions in the Administration Server and description for
the question.
The name must be unique and be limited to 1000 characters. The question is truncated to a
single line.
3. Select a Language.
Multiple languages are supported within the configuration. If there is nothing defined, then
the editor will show blank. If the Allow Multiple Languages option is disabled, then the
language option will be hidden.
4. Enter a question.
5. Enter a tooltip for the question.
6. Click New Answer.
a. Enter a unique name and description for the answer.
b. Select a Language.
c. Enter the answer.
d. Enter a tooltip for the answer.
e. Click OK.
7. Choose a Selection Style.
8. Click OK.

Editing a Question and Answer

To edit questions and answers:
1. Select a question in the Question Library, and click Properties.
2. Make the necessary changes.
3. To change an answer:
a. Click Edit in the row of the answer you want to change.
b. Make the necessary changes.
c. Click OK.
4. Click OK.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 97

 Labelling Configurations / Configuration Settings

Deleting a Question and Answer

To delete questions:
1. Select a question in the Question Library, and click Delete.
2. Click Yes to confirm the deletion.
If you confirm the deletion of the Question, the administration service provides a warning if
the Question is being used in a Decision Tree.
To delete an answer:
1. Select a question in the Question Library, and click Properties.
2. Click Delete in the row of the answer you want to remove.
3. Click OK.

Copying a Question and Answer

To copy a question:
1. Select a question in the Question Library, and click Copy.
The Question dialog appears with the name of the question as <Question Name> - Copy.
2. Make any necessary changes.
3. Click OK.

Configuration Settings
Opening Configuration Settings provides access to settings that are common across all policies in
this Label Configuration. The settings apply to all policies. Users operating under different policies

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 98

 Labelling Configurations / Configuration Settings

will see no difference about these settings.

Classifier Application Settings

Each application has its own settings which are viewed by selecting the appropriate tab.

NOTE: Options are omitted or 'greyed' if the application / feature is not licensed.

Allow Classification of Meeting Requests and

Appointments
NOTE:
l This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Outlook.
l This setting is not supported in Mail Add-In.
l OWA Classifier supports classification of meeting requests and appointments, but the
support is not configurable.
l Visual markings (Subject, FLOT/LLOT and Attachment lists) are not supported on
appointments.

Enable this setting to define whether the Classifier label selection features will be displayed when
the user is drafting a meeting request or appointment.

Allow Classification of Tasks

NOTE:
l This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Outlook.
l Folder view labelling of tasks is not supported.
l OWA Classifier supports classification of tasks subject to the standard OWA limitations
that you cannot create, accept, or edit assigned tasks. Only local tasks can be created
and edited within OWA.

Enable this setting to define whether the Classifier label selection features will be displayed when
the user is drafting a task.

NOTE: The label summary bar may not be shown when choosing to assign a task to someone.

Allow Folder View Labelling

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to Email Classifier and OWA Classifier.

Enable this setting to define if users will be able to label items in Outlook folders, and/or modify
labels on items in Outlook folders.
If the feature is Enabled, the user has access to two additional actions:

NOTE: OWA Classifier only supports the Set Label mechanism.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 99

 Labelling Configurations / Configuration Settings

l A Label selected message(s) button when viewing a folder summary in Outlook

l A Set Label button when viewing an open message.
A summary of user operation can be found in Folder View Labelling Operation.
Labelling a document using the Folder View mechanism may fail (for example, permissions). The
text displayed in this circumstance is configurable using the Text displayed when Folder View
labelling fails.

Allow Label Change on Protected Documents

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to Word (Office Classifier).

Enable this setting to define if users will be able to change the label and markings on protected
word documents (File > Info > Protect document > Restrict editing) where editing restrictions is
set to No changes (Read only) or Comments. This setting is applicable when either Add a Header
/ Footer / Watermark and Add this image to header / footer / top / bottom / Watermark rules are
used.

NOTE: If Editing restrictions is set to Filling in forms, then the label value can be changed, but
any Headers / Footers / Watermarks will not be changed. Setting Editing Restrictions to
Tracked changes has no impact on Classifier operation - the label and markings can be
updated.

For supported Editing restrictions types, Classifier must register Header/Footer/Watermark label
information as "Exceptions" within the "Restrict Editing" mechanism. If the setting is Enabled,
Header/Footer / Watermark information will be displayed enclosed with square brackets (for
example, [Classifier test Public]).

NOTE: If a document has never had a Classifier label applied (even an empty label) then
Office Classifier cannot add a marking to that (protected) document unless the whole Header
/ Footer / Watermark area have been manually marked as Exceptions within the Restrict
Editing mechanism.

Allow Manual Upgrade when Sending Messages

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Outlook. This setting has no effect if
Automatically elevate email label is Enabled.

If this setting is enabled, and a high-water mark check rule is triggered because labels of
attachments are higher than the current message label, and it is possible to derive a label for the
message that will dominate all attachment labels, then the policy check dialog will display an
Upgrade message button.
If the setting is disabled, or a high-water mark label cannot be derived, then only a Remove
(attachment) button will be displayed.

Allow Use of OWA Basic/Light Mode

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to OWA Classifier.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 100

 Labelling Configurations / Configuration Settings

Enable this setting to allow a site to disable OWA Basic/Light Mode if it has only installed the
OWA Classifier Premium Mode. If disabled, OWA Classifier will intercept any requests to operate
in OWA Basic/Light Mode.

Allow Visual Markings on a Meeting Request Response

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Outlook. This setting is only used if Allow
classification of meeting requests and appointments is Enabled.

This setting supports the following options which control in which circumstances Classifier will
apply Visual Marking rules (Subject/FLOT/LLOT) to Meeting Request responses.
l Disabled: Visual marking rules will never be applied to a meeting request response.
l On Edit Response: Visual marking rules will be applied if the user chooses Edit the
response before sending.
l On Send Response Now: Visual marking rules will be applied if the user chooses Send the
response now.
l All: Visual marking rules will always be applied.

Always Use Distribution List Clearances

NOTE: : This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Outlook, OWA, and Mail Add-In.

A clearance may be assigned to an Active Directory Distribution Group - a Distribution Group that
has an associated email address.
If there is no clearance assigned to a Distribution Group (DG), Email Classifier will attempt to
expand the DG and use the DG member's clearances to perform clearance checks.
If this setting is disabled, then DGs are always expanded. If the relevant setting is enabled, then
DG clearance will be used if available. If DG clearance is not available, then the DG will be
expanded to perform clearance checks.

Apply Headers/Footers when Label is Changed

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Excel.

Applying headers and footers in Excel via Classifier rules can have a performance impact. Each
time the header/footer is changed for each Worksheet, Excel communicates with the default
printer which becomes more noticeable as the number of sheets increases. This setting can be
used (in conjunction with Apply Headers/Footers when workbook is saved ) to reduce the impact.
When this setting is enabled, all Headers and Footers are updated, every time the Label is
changed. If disabled, the workbook can have inconsistent markings when viewed in Print Preview
or Page Layout view.

NOTE: Headers and Footers are always updated when the workbook / sheet is printed.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 101

 Labelling Configurations / Configuration Settings

Apply Headers/Footers when Workbook is Saved

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Excel.

Applying headers and footers in Excel via Classifier rules can have a performance impact. Each
time the header/footer is changed for each Worksheet, Excel communicates with the default
printer which becomes more noticeable as the number of sheets increases. This setting can be
used (in conjunction with Apply Headers/Footers when Label is changed ) to reduce the impact.
When this setting is enabled, all Headers and Footers are updated, every time thedocument is
saved. If disabled, the workbook can have inconsistent markings when viewed in Print Preview or
Page Layout view.

NOTE: Headers and Footers are always updated when the workbook / sheet is printed.

Automatically Elevate Email Label

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Outlook.

Enabled this setting to direct Classifier (when attaching a document) to automatically raise the
label on an email to encompass that document's label. If that automatic action cannot complete
(for example, there is a clash of single selection list values), AND a Perform high-water mark
check is configured, then a further check is appliedwhen the message is sent, and the user
involved in resolution of any residual issues according to the Warn/Prevent setting in the rule.
If this setting is enabled and a high-water mark check initially fails, then the software will do the
following:
l For Hierarchic Selectors ( Single selection list ) it will set the selector value to the highest
value from the message and the set of attachments and Pass the check.
l For Informational Selectors (those with Include this Selector in Clearance Checks unset -
Single selection list and Multiple selection list) it will retain the message setting for the
selector regardless of any attachment values and Pass the check.
For all other Selectors if a single value is available for the selector that will dominate the
message and attachment values for that selector, then the message label will be set to that
value and the check is Passed. If no such value is available, the check fails, and the user
will be notified of the issue.
A message labelled as "Confidential" with an attachment of "Confidential Sales" would have its
label automatically changed to "Confidential Sales", but a message labelled as "Confidential
Engineering" with an attachment of "Confidential Sales" triggers the dialog described in Policies
on page 134 .
If this setting is enabled, then the setting Allow manual upgrade when sending messages has no
effect.

Automatically Update Label Fields

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Word.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 102

 Labelling Configurations / Configuration Settings

Enable this setting so Classifier will automatically search for fields containing Classifier markings
whenever the Classification is changed.

NOTE: Certain content (for example, copied from a web page) can contain lots of fields
resulting in a significant overhead when Classifier searches for field values to update. This
setting allows the user to control when the field update is performed.

Custom Format for 'Insert Label'

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Word.

The name of the Marking Format to be used if incorporating a Classifier label into a Word
document using the Insert Label context menu action. If this value is not set then the value
associated with Custom Format for Summary Markings is used. See General Settings on page
116.

Custom Format for 'Label' Column

NOTE: : This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Outlook.

The name of the Marking Format to be used if displaying a Classifier label in a column in an
Outlook folder summary as described in Folder View Column Name on page 104.
If this value is not set, then the value associated with Custom Format for Summary Markings will
be used.

Display Selector Values in Context Menu

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to File Classifier.

Enable this setting to provide additional control over the context menu display as described in the
File Classifier Guide. File Classifier context menu will display relevant selector values and the
current classification.

Enable Back Button on Save As

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Visio.

Enable this setting to show the Back button if a check dialog is shown during Save As operation.
This setting should always be Disabled for Visio 2013/2016 as there is no means of cancelling a
Save As operation at the point at which Classifier is invoked. Leaving the setting to Enabled for
Visio 2013/2016 may mean that rule actions are not performed at all.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 103

 Labelling Configurations / Configuration Settings

Ensure Attachment Markings are Consistent

NOTE: This setting is only relevant if you have installed and used Power Classifier or File
Classifier. This setting is only applicable to Email, OWA and Notes Classifier. This setting
affects the checks made when a message is sent.

When this setting is enabled, Office Classifier supported attachments (Microsoft Word, Excel,
PowerPoint, Project and Visio) are checked for the custom property set by File or Power Classifier
to indicate that they have updated the label value, and the visible markings may be inconsistent
with the label value. If the custom property is set, then the user is prompted and submission
halted, allowing the user to take corrective action. The text displayed to the user is configured
through the Text to display if attachment markings are inconsistent.

Ensure Label Dominates All Portion Markings

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Outlook.

Enable this setting so Classifier can include Portion Markings in the body of an email message
when performing Label Dominance checks.
It only has effect if Portion Marking is enabled for Outlook.

NOTE: The message Subject and the message Body are scanned for portion markings. Thus,
a marking (for example, [RES] for Restricted) displayed in the Subject of a reply or forward
message will be treated the same as [RES] inserted as a Portion Marking within the message
body.

Folder View Column Name

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Outlook.

This setting (previously known as Column name for Folder View) allows you to define the heading
for a column you can then add into folder views. The column will show any Classifier label
associated with a message using the Custom format for Summary Markings .
1. Define the required name (for example, Classifier) as the Folder View column name.
2. Deploy the configuration change. You can then add the named column into the Inbox
folder.
3. Start Outlook.
4. Select the Inbox folder.
5. Send a Classifier labelled message to that folder.
6. Open and close the received message.
7. Select View / Add columns (or Position the cursor over the headings for the Inbox and
choose Field Chooser from the context menu).
8. Select User-defined fields in Inbox from the drop down.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 104

 Labelling Configurations / Configuration Settings

The 'Column' name you assign does appear if you have chosen a value that already
appears in one of the other lists available under Field Chooser (for example, Label appears
under All Appointment fields). You can check this by using the Manual definition of column
name mechanism described below.
9. Select the required field and drag this into the required position in the folder column
headings.
10. Replicate that Folder View to all other folders. Consider selecting the parent nodes and
using the Apply view to sub-folders setting.

Manually defining column name:

You can manually make your column name available in any folder as follows:
1. Select the folder, invoke Field Chooser, and choose User-defined fields.
2. Click New and enter your configured Column name (for example, Classifier Label).
If you enter a name that is already in use in one the other lists, you will be notified.
3. Select the new item and drag and drop it into the required place in the folder columns
headings.

Folder View Column Populate On Start-Up

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Outlook.

This setting may be useful in avoiding problems when performing operations such as follow up or
apply a category on messages when the Folder View column name option is enabled.
Such problems can arise when running in on-line mode (rather than cache mode) for messages
delivered to the Inbox when Classifier is not running (for example, overnight).
When this setting is enabled, on start-up, Classifier will search all the received main folders
(usually the Inbox) in each Mailbox, plus any subordinate folders, to ensure that the Classifier
Folder View column property is populated.

Force Summary Marking in Task Pane

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Word, Excel, PowerPoint and Project.

Enable this setting to determine whether users are allowed to close the task pane that displays
the Summary Marking.

Include Embedded Images When Performing Attachment

Checks
NOTE: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Outlook.

Enable this setting to determine how embedded images are handled by Check for the high-water
mark, Check clearance for attachments, and Check for unlabelled attachments rules. See
Policies on page 134.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 105

 Labelling Configurations / Configuration Settings

NOTE: If the message is in RTF format, attachment checks cannot be performed on

embedded attachments.

Maximum File Size for Icon Overlay (In KB)

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to File Classifier.

If icon overlays are in use, each overlay (typically 6) has to load the file to determine the correct
icon to display. For large files this can lead to visible delays to explorer.
This setting allows you to limit the icon overlay operation to files below a specified size. By
default, the value is not set indicating that no limit is applied.

McAfee Host DLP Marking

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Outlook. This setting is only relevant if the
associated setting McAfee Host DLP scan is enabled.

Enabling this setting determines the text string (as derived from the selected Marking Format) to
be passed to McAfee. The text string derived from the Marking Format can include the selected
label values.

McAfee Host DLP Scan

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Outlook.

This setting relates to how Email Classifier interacts with McAfee Host DLP software (HDLP).
Classifier checks whether DLP is available at start up. If DLP is unavailable, the setting is ignored.
When enabled, Classifier is directed to call an API provided by DLP for use in Outlook
environments to pass text string as part of Classifier and ePO integration. The text string passed
is determined by the Marking Format configured by McAfee Host, and can include the selected
label values (classification). The DLP API is invoked just before the message is sent.

ePO Configuration
It is assumed that ePO has been configured to trust Classifier as follows, otherwise both
components will process the message in an uncoordinated manner.
To republish the ePO policy:
1. Navigate to the policy catalogue and open the current client configuration.
2. Select Settings/ Operational Modes and Modules and then verify that Outlook Add-ins /
Activate 3rd Party Add-in Integration is Enabled.
3. Go to Settings / Email Protection and under the Outlook 3rd party integration section select
Boldon James from the Vendor Name list.
4. Re-publish the ePO policy.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 106

 Labelling Configurations / Configuration Settings

Portion Marking
NOTE: This setting is only applicable to Classifier Mail-in, Microsoft Outlook, Word, Excel, and
PowerPoint.

A portion mark is an abbreviated marking derived from a label value (for example, [P] for Public).
This Portion Marking application setting controls whether users can insert a Portion Marking into
the content of a message, document, spreadsheet, or presentation.
This Portion Marking action is only available if the relevant application Portion Marking setting is
enabled, AND Configuration Settings has a valid Marking Format configured.

NOTE:
Outlook must be configured to use Word as the email editor. Outlook. Not supported in a
Plain Text message body.
A Portion Marking may only be inserted into an empty cell in an Excel spreadsheet.
(Outlook and Mail Add-in) Portion Marks (Choose Portion Mark) are always inserted at the
current insertion point within the message body (even if the visible cursor is in the Subject
field).

If Portion Marking is available, then the user can insert a Portion Mark at the current position in the
message / document using either the Portion Mark action in the ribbon bar, or the Insert Portion
Marking action in the context menu for Word and Excel (the context menu action is not available
in Outlook, Mail Add-in, or PowerPoint).
To insert a Portion Mark:
1. Position the insertion point in the message / document.
2. Choose the Portion Mark to be applied, either via the Portion Mark action on the ribbon bar
or Insert Portion Marking action from the Word or Excel context menu.
The standard label selection dialog appears:
3. Choose the required label value and click OK. (If the user has defined Favourite Label
values, they will be available through the Favourites drop down).
The label value will appear at the current insertion point formatted according to the
configured Custom Format for Portion Marking.
To remove a Portion Mark:
1. Select the Portion Mark text (including any delimiters).
2. Click Delete.

Label Dominance and Automatic Label Upgrade

When a Portion Mark is inserted, Office Classifier, where possible, automatically upgrades the
current label value to ensure that it dominates the Portion Mark being inserted as described in
Label Dominance on page 69.
Office Classifier only performs such label dominance checks at the time the Portion Mark is
inserted. It does not perform any more checking of the label against Portion Marks (for example,
on Label change or document Save).

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 107

 Labelling Configurations / Configuration Settings

Office Classifier will make no change during dominance checking where the current label value
contains a value for a non-hierarchic element that is different to the value for that element in the
Portion Mark. For example: Label = Internal / Sales and Portion Mark = Internal / Support, then
label would remain as Internal / Sales with no user involvement.

NOTE:
l Single Selection list and Multiple selection list Selectors only take part in automatic
upgrade of Portion marks if they have Include this selector in clearance and attachment
checks enabled.
l Email Classifier will correctly identify Portion Markings ONLY if the associated Marking
Format has delimiters around the entire marking format (for example, [{Classification
(Portion Mark)}]). See Properties (Marking Format) for details on how to do this.

Email Classifier usually only performs such label dominance checks at the time the Portion
Marking is inserted. It does not perform any more checking of the label against Portion Marking
(for example, on Message Send).
However, if the additional setting Ensure label dominates all portion markings is enabled, then a
dominance check will be performed if the user changes the label of the message. If Email
Classifier detects an attempted downgrade the following will be displayed, and the label
downgrade cancelled.

NOTE: Any lowering of a Hierarchic selector constitutes downgrade, as will removal of a non-
hierarchic selector. Any other change of value of a non-hierarchic selector will not constitute a
downgrade.

The Mail Add-in supports label dominance checking through the rule processing. See "Policies on
page 134. Automatic Label Upgrade is not supported on the Mail Add-in. "

Process Rules When Exporting

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Word, Excel, PowerPoint and Project. If a
policy check dialog appears for PowerPoint or Project, the user must Fix the issue or
Continue, they cannot go Back.

Enable this setting to allow you to enforce rules such as Check these mandatory selectors when
an Export operation is performed. Any checks that fail will interrupt the flow and involve the user in
the choice of action according to the Warn / Prevent setting defined in the rule.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 108

 Labelling Configurations / Configuration Settings

Process Rules When Printing

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and Project. If a
policy check dialog appears for PowerPoint or Project, the user must Fix the issue or
Continue, they cannot go Back.

Enable this setting to allow you to enforce rules such as Check these mandatory selectors when a
Print operationis performed. Any checks that fail will interrupt the flow and involve the user in the
choice of action according to the Warn / Prevent setting defined in the rule.

Process Rules When Saving

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Word, Excel and PowerPoint, Project and
Visio. If a policy check dialog appears for Visio, the user must Fix the issue or Continue, they
cannot go Back.

Enable this setting to allow you to enforce rules such as Check these mandatory selectors (
Check rules ) when a Save operation is performed. Any checks that fail will interrupt the flow and
involve the user in the choice of action according to the Warn / Prevent setting defined in the rule.

Search for Outlook Item Properties That Match Email

Label Locations
NOTE: This setting is only applicable to Outlook.

When enabled and when processing Label Locations, if a defined x-header item cannot be found,
then Classifier will check to see whether there is an Outlook Item Property with the same name as
the x-header that can be used instead. When disabled, standard processing of Label Locations
applies.

Set Property to Refresh Markings

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to SharePoint Classifier and File Classifier.

The effects of this setting are described in the SharePoint Classifier and File Classifier User
Guides.

Show Classifier 'C' on Icon Overlay

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to File Classifier.

When enabled (Default): File Classifier icon overlays will include the Classifier symbol .

Show Classifier on Ribbon When Reading

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to Outlook.

Enable this setting to display the Classifier ribbon entry when reading a message.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 109

 Labelling Configurations / Configuration Settings

Show 'Insert Label' Context Menu

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Word.

Enable this setting so the Insert Label Context is available in Word.

Show Label Dialog on Save Or Print

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Word, Excel, PowerPoint Project. and Visio.
Further control over the style of the label dialog displayed is provided by Show label dialog
style. Regardless of the value of this setting, Classifier will always process the configured
rules (for example, Check these mandatory selectors) which in some circumstances may
result in a further label dialog appearing.

This setting supports three values:

l Default: The user experience saving or printing a document is controlled by any rules
defined (for example, Check these mandatory selectors and Check for use of default label )
and the setting Process rules when saving .
l Always: The Label selection dialog will be displayed if the user saves or prints a document.
The user can modify the label or continue the operation.
l If message label matches default label: If the current label matches the default label when
the user saves or prints a document, then the Label selection dialog will be displayed. The
user can modify the label, or continue the operation.

Show Label Dialog on Send

NOTE: : This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Outlook and Lotus Notes. Further control
over the style of the label dialog displayed is provided by Show label dialog style. Regardless
of the value of this setting, Classifier will always process the configured rules (for example,
Check these mandatory selectors) which in some circumstances may result in a further label
dialog appearing.

This setting supports three values:

l Default: The user experience sending a message is controlled by any rules defined (for
example, Check thesemandatory selectors and Check for use of default label).
l Always: The Label selection dialog will be displayed if the user sends a message. The user
can modify the label or continue the operation.
l If message label matches default label: If the current label matches the default label when
the user sends a message, then the Label selection dialog will be displayed. The user can
modify the label or continue the operation.

Show Label Dialog Style

NOTE: This setting is applicable to Microsoft Outlook, Word, Excel, PowerPoint, Project, Visio,
and Notes.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 110

 Labelling Configurations / Configuration Settings

In various circumstances, Classifier will automatically display a label selection dialog (for
example, Mandatory selector required). By default, if Use Single Click with pre-defined labels is
configured, then a Single Click format is displayed; otherwise the Full label selection dialog
appears.
This per-application setting provides control over the style of dialog displayed when Use Single
Click with pre- defined labels is configured AND one or more of the following is triggered:
l Show label dialog on Save or Print
l Show label dialog on Send
l Show label dialog when mandatory label
This setting supports two values:
l Single Click when configured (Default): A Single Click label selection dialog is displayed if
Use Single Click with pre-defined labels is configured, otherwise the Full label selection
dialog appears.
l lFull Classification Dialog: The Full label selection dialog is displayed even though Use
Single Click with pre- defined labels is configured.

Show Label Dialog When Mandatory Label

NOTE: This setting is applicable to Email Classifier, Notes Classifier and Office Classifier
(Microsoft Word, Excel, PowerPoint, Project, and Visio).

This setting modifies the end user experience when Mandatory Selector rules are triggered on
Send, Save or Print (see also Process Rules When Printing and Process Rules When Saving ).
If this setting is Enabled when a Mandatory Selector check fails (there is no value for the
Mandatory Selector), AND Warn/Prevent in the rule is set to Prevent, then the label dialog shown
is displayed rather than the general Rule exception dialog, allowing the user to set the label
directly.

Further control over the style of the label dialog displayed is provided by Show label dialog style.
The text that appears at the top of the dialog may be modified by the Text displayed when
mandatory label is absent setting.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 111

 Labelling Configurations / Configuration Settings

If this setting is Disabled when a Mandatory Selector check fails (there is no label), OR
Warn/Prevent is set to Warn, then the general Rule exception dialog is displayed with the
Remove/Back/Continue options. The text in the body of this dialog is controlled by the relevant
application Rule.

Show Summary Marking in Task Pane

NOTE: This setting is applicable to Microsoft Outlook, Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and Project.

This setting controls whether the Summary Marking value appears in an information bar at the
bottom of an open document window.
If there is currently no label value selected, then the Text to display if no marking is available will
be displayed as the Summary Marking value.
Depending on the environment, the user can expand and contract this information bar, and may
be able to close the bar with no means of re-instatement. The Show Summary Marking action
may be Enabled to provide a Classifier menu action to re-instate the Summary Marking display if
the information bar is closed.
The Force Summary Marking in task pane may be Enabled to prevent the user from closing the
information bar.

Show Summary Marking In Title Bar

NOTE: This setting is applicable to Microsoft Word, Excel, PowerPoint, Project and Visio, but
has no effect in Visio or PowerPoint 2010 (and later) which do not support alteration of the
window title.

When enabled, the Summary Marking value is inserted into the Window title bar. It is appended to
the document name.

Suppress Classifier Alerts When Running Macros

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to Word, Excel, and PowerPoint.

You must enable the Trust access to the VBA project object model. To find this option:

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 112

 Labelling Configurations / Configuration Settings

1. From your application, select File > Options > Trust Center.
2. In the Microsoft <Word/Excel/PowerPoint> Trust Center section, select Trust Center
Settings.
3. From the Macro Settings tab, selectTrust access to the VBA project object model.
When Suppress Classifier Alerts When Running Macros is enabled, Classifier alerts are triggered
while running macros will not be displayed.

Text Displayed When an Item Without A Label Cannot be

Checked into SharePoint
NOTE: This setting is only applicable to SharePoint Classifier.

The effects of this setting are described in the SharePoint Classifier Guide.

Text Displayed when OWA Basic/Light Mode is Disabled

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to OWA Classifier.

This setting allows you to configure the User defined message to be displayed to a user if an
attempt to use Allow use of OWA Basic/Light Mode is inhibited by OWA Classifier.

Update Markings when Indicated

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Word, Excel, PowerPoint, Project, and Visio.
The setting is only relevant if you are using Power Classifier or File Classifier.

This setting provides an additional level of control if File or Power Classifier is used to label Office
Classifier documents.
Under default operation if File Classifier or Power Classifier labels a document, it will set a custom
property on Office Classifier documents to indicate that the Label may not match the document
markings. Office Classifier applications detect this custom property the next time the document is
opened and update all markings.
It is possible (particularly if using Power Classifier to label many files) that the label values applied
cause unexpected effects on the markings. This setting allows you to suspend (on a per
application basis) the automatic updating of markings, providing more time to resolve marking
issues.
Although Power Classifier for files can set the setting on a document, it is a document custom
property. It is still left to Email and Office Classifier to implement it.
When enabled and a document is opened, the Office application will react to the custom property
set by File or Power Classifier and refresh the document markings when the document is opened,
clearing the custom property.
When disabled, the Office application ignores the custom property when a document is opened.
However, actions such as Save and Print may still trigger an update of markings.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 113

 Labelling Configurations / Configuration Settings

NOTE: Newer versions of File Classifier and Power Classifier provide control over the setting
of the refresh custom property as described in the relevant product guide.

Use Alternate Data Stream (ADS) Marking

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to File Classifier. For Visio files, the General setting Use
Alternate Data Stream (ADS) for Visio files takes precedence.

This setting provides additional control over whether File Classifier writes label information to the
Alternate Data Stream for file types that are not supported (that is, NOT configured in
DocLabeller2 - for example, TXT files).
When enabled, File Classifier will store the label in the Alternate Data Stream.

Use Default Label When Replying to Unmarked Emails

NOTE:
This setting is only applicable to Email, OWA, Mail Add-in and Notes Classifier.
Classifier Mail Add-in and Notes Classifier always apply the default label.

This setting allows you to control what happens if the original received message has no label.
This option has no effect if a default label has not been defined. Enabled or Disabled will create a
"Reply" with no label.
To check this setting, go to Labelling Configurations > Configuration Settings > Classifier
Application Settings > Outlook Settings tab > Use default label when replying to unmarked emails.
Enable this setting so the Reply message can adopt the default label value (if configured) as the
initial label value for the reply message.

Use from Field for Originator Clearance

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Outlook and OWA Classifier.

This setting is only relevant if you are using Perform Clearance Checking on Originator rules
under Email or OWA Classifier. In environments where a user can submit mail from more than
one mailbox, this setting can be used to ensure that Email Classifier uses the From value for
Originator Clearance checks rather than the default (primary mailbox).
Classifier Mail Add-in always uses from field for originator clearance.
Enable this setting if you want Email / OWA Classifier to use the From value to perform Originator
Clearance Checks.
Disable this setting if you want Email / OWA Classifier to always use the Primary mailbox identity
to perform Originator Clearance Checks.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 114

 Labelling Configurations / Configuration Settings

Warn if File Contents cannot be Accessed

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Outlook, OWA, and Notes Classifier. This
setting is not supported in Mail Add-In.

This setting influences the operation of Check for the high-water mark . If the setting is Enabled ,
then the user will be 'warned' of any failure to access a file during those checks. Such failures can
arise, for example, if encrypted ZIP files are attached or the document is in a format inaccessible
to Classifier (for example, an old PDF format).
Further details can be found under Policies on page 134.

Watermarks Use Marking Format Font

NOTE: This setting only applicable to Microsoft Word.

This setting supports controls the effect of adding a Watermark as the result of an Add a
Watermark rule firing:
l Disabled (Default): Classifier will set the Watermark font to Calibri.
l Enabled: Classifier will set the Watermark font to the first font used in the applicable
designated marking format.

Titus Interoperability
When you have enabled Titus Interoperation, you must configure Titus Interoperability so Titus
and Boldon James can work together.
To configure Titus Interoperability:
1. Select the Titus Interoperability Settings tab.
2. Enter the Namespace URI. This is used to generate a Titus-40 label. This must match the
URI defined in the Titus Configuration file exactly.
3. If you are using:
l Microsoft Outlook, enable Support interoperation for Email

l Google Mail, enable Support interoperation for Google Gmail.

l Microsoft Office, enable Support interoperation for Office

4. If you want to include a Titus-30 label when sending an email using Microsoft Outlook, you
must:
a. enter the separator characters for multi-select selector values exactly as in the Titus
Configuration file
b. enter the Property Name as used for the TLPropertyRoot value to decode Titus-30
labels. For example, for Outlook, TLPropertyRoot=TitusCorp, Classification=TITUS
Internal, ContainsPersonalData=False; for Office, the value is used as a prefix to the
custom properties (for example, TitusCorpClassification=Internal). The Property
Name must match exactly as in the Titus Configuration under the Metadata Handlers.
Ensure the Do not use Schema Mapping for metadata with this ‘Property Name’ (all
others require Schema Mapping) checkbox is selected in the Titus Configuration.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 115

 Labelling Configurations / Configuration Settings

General Settings
These settings are common to multiple applications, although a feature may only be applicable to
a subset of applications.

Automatically Expand Policy Warning Messages

NOTE: Not applicable to Classifier Mail Add-in.

When disabled, the text displayed in policy check dialogs will not be automatically expanded
when the dialog is first displayed, and will include the button "Click for more information", allowing
the user to view any additional text.
If enabled, Classifier automatically expands the text the first time the Policy Check Dialog is
displayed, and includes the button "Click for less information"

Azure RMS Document Tracking

NOTE: Only applicable to Word, Excel, and PowerPoint.

This setting is only effective if RMS Client 2.1 has been installed.
Enable this setting to provide the user with the means to invoke RMS Tracking from the Classifier
Options menu.
The action is greyed until the document has been saved and has had RMS protection applied.
Selecting the Track Document action invokes the RMS tracking sequence - interacting with the
relevant portal. The default portal address can be overridden using the Azure RMS Tracking
portal URL override setting.

Azure RMS Tracking Portal URL Override

NOTE: Only applicable to Word, Excel, and PowerPoint. This setting is only relevant if Azure
RMS Document Tracking is Enabled.

It allows you to override the default RMS portal address by the supplied URL.

Cache Active Directory Attributes on Start-up

Conditions and Marking Formats may be defined that refer to Active Directory attributes. By
default, Classifier will cache such attributes when they are first referenced. This setting allows you
to direct Classifier to cache the attributes when the application starts.
When disabled, Classifier will only cache Active Directory attributes when first referenced.
When enabled, Classifier will cache Active Directory attributes when the application starts.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 116

 Labelling Configurations / Configuration Settings

Check Label Location First

NOTE: This setting is usually only relevant in certain specialised environments.

When enabled, Classifier will check Label Locations for a label value before checking for an
internal Classifier label.

Classification History
NOTE: This setting is only applicable to Word, Excel and PowerPoint.

When enabled, Classifier will store classification change history within the document for
supported file types each time the document is saved.
Classification History Display controls whether the user can see and Clear the history information
but only for Office 2010 or later. Date items appear in local time.

Classification History Display

When enabled, the user will be able to view any stored Classification History. The Classification
History is available via a separate File > Classifier > Classification History option on the
backstage view which will display the following dialog:

The user may clear all the history.

The text displayed to the user may be configured using the User Interface Definition mechanisms.

Classification Ribbon Single Click as a Gallery

The option setting on the CAS under General Settings-> Classifier Ribbon button as a gallery
allows Single Click UI display to provide smaller real estate for Classifier Client icons on the Office
Ribbon.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 117

 Labelling Configurations / Configuration Settings

NOTE:
By default, this setting is turned off so it needs to be switched to ENABLED.
This setting is not applicable to OWA Classifier, Classifier Mail Add-in, Notes Classifier,or
Mobile Classifier.

This setting defines how Classifier inserts the Classifier label ribbon group. It supports two values:
l Disabled: the normal display of Classifier icons is displayed on the Office Ribbon bar in the
three different modes.
l Enabled: the smaller real estate display of Classifier icons is applied to the Office Ribbon.

Classifier Ribbon Group Location

NOTE: This setting is not applicable to OWA Classifier, Classifier Mail Add-in, Notes Classifier
or Mobile Classifier.

This setting defines how Classifier inserts the Classifier label ribbon group. It supports four
values:
l Default: Classifier will insert the Classifier ribbon bar group after the Clipboard group in
most application situations, but after the Respond group in an Outlook Read message
window.
l First: Classifier will attempt to determine the first group in the ribbon bar and insert the
Classifier group before this (first) group.
l Last: Classifier will insert the Classifier ribbon bar group at the end of the current groups in
the ribbon bar.
l Custom Tab: Classifier will display the Classifier Label selection group as a Custom Tab.

NOTE: Other software and or site/user configuration of the ribbon bar may have an effect on
where the Classifier ribbon group actually appears.

Classifier Ribbon Layout Mode

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Outlook, Word, Excel, and PowerPoint.

The Classifier ribbon layout has the following options:

l Default mode: As it currently exists.
l Standard mode: This mode will move the label options into a single drop down split button
and the other menu and options are rationalised into more meaningful groups. The label
split button will contain a gallery of single click elements as well as options which relate
directly to the label.
l Minimal mode: This mode will show just one button on the ribbon. This split button contains
all the Classifier functionality in one place.

Content Checking - Case Sensitive

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Outlook, Word, Excel and PowerPoint.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 118

 Labelling Configurations / Configuration Settings

When enabled, case sensitive matching is preformed.

Content Checking - Include Document Properties

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to Microsoft Outlook, Word and Excel.

When disabled, document properties are skipped when performing content checks.
When enabled, document properties are also checked when performing content checks.

Custom Format For 'Classifier Auditing'

NOTE:
The auditing format used should be appropriate and set up from day one so Reporting can
make use of earlier events even if it wasn't installed when the events were generated.
To improve the parsing of individual selector values, the marking prefix and suffix of selector
elements in the marking format, should not be a space character.

Enabling this setting uses the name of the Marking Format for incorporating a Classifier label into
a classifier log entry.
If this value is not set then the value associated with Custom Format for Summary Markings will
be used.

Custom Format For 'Label Summary' Custom Document

Property
NOTE: This setting is only applicable to Office Classifier.

The name of the Marking Format to be used for storing a Classifier label into the Classifier
'private' document property bjDocumentSecurity Label( Document Properties (Office Classifier) ).
If this value is not set, then the value associated with Custom Format for Summary Markings will
be used.

Custom Format for Portion Marking

NOTE: This feature only applies to Word, Excel, PowerPoint, Outlook, and Mail Add-in.

This is the name of the Marking Format to be used when inserting a user selected Portion Mark in
an Office Classifier document (Word / Excel / PowerPoint), or an Outlook email.
This Marking Format should include delimiters around the value to ease user identification in the
content and to allow the Email Classifier to find markings in some situations.
You may wish to configure the alternative 'Portion Marking' Selector values for use in this Marking
Format as described in Properties (Selector Values) / Portion.
Further details of Portion Marking can be found in Portion Marking on page 107.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 119

 Labelling Configurations / Configuration Settings

NOTE: This setting must be configured before the Portion Mark action will appear in the
application ribbon bar. Any Environment properties included in a Marking Format may not
appear if that Marking Format is assigned as the Custom Format for Portion Markings.

Custom Format for Summary Markings

NOTE: If this setting is blank, Classifier generates a simple text Summary Marking using space
separated selector value names, with a background colour corresponding to the first selector
value in the current Classification (label) that has a colour associated. If no colour is found,
Classifier will use an in-built default (FFFFC8 ).

This is the name of the Marking Format to be used:

l when displaying the Summary Marking in the Information Bar in a document or message
window. The display of the Summary Marking is controlled by the Show Summary Marking
in Task Pane for Email Classifier or Office Classifier and Show Summary Marking in Title
Bar (Word / Excel / PowerPoint) settings. Under OWA Classifier, Classifier Mail Add-in,
Notes Classifier and Mobile Classifier the summary marking is always displayed (there is
no configuration setting).
l Label summary at the bottom of Label Selection Dialog.
l The ‘label’ button at the top of the policy check dialog.
l When adding a label to the title of office documents.
l When displaying a list of Favourites.
l When displaying a list of Portion Mark values.
l When displaying a list of Recently used labels and Portion Marks.
If this setting is blank Classifier generates a simple text Summary Marking from the selector
values in the label.

NOTE:
l Given the usage listed above, you may find it useful to keep the Summary Marking
format as simple as possible (for example, omit the Label Configuration name).
l Any Environment properties or Document properties included in a Marking Format may
not appear if that Marking Format is assigned as the Custom Format for Summary
Markings.

Disable OK on Label Dialog If Mandatory Values are

Missing
NOTE: Only applicable to Microsoft Outlook, Word, Excel, PowerPoint, Project and Visio.

The label selection dialog displayed in various circumstances includes an OK button.

By default the OK button is enabled even if there are mandatory selectors missing and the rule is
configured as Prevent. This may lead to user confusion.
When enabled, this setting can be used to ensure that if a rule is configured as Prevent, the OK
button is disabled until the user has selected a valid classification (rules configured as Warn will

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 120

 Labelling Configurations / Configuration Settings

continue to enable the OK button). When disabled, the OK button is available to the user even if
the rule is configured as Prevent .

Display of Favourites Button

NOTE: The feature is not applicable to OWA Classifier, Classifier Mail Add-in, Notes 8, or
Mobile Classifier.

When enabled, this setting allows the Favourites button to appear and the features are available
to the user.

Display of Label Dialog Launch Button

NOTE: The setting is not applicable to OWA Classifier, Classifier Mail Add-in, Notes Classifier
or Mobile Classifier.

In the following circumstances, users may require access to a full Label selection dialog:
l Use Single Click with pre-defined labels and that it is Enabled for the policy.
l Not all selectors are accessible via the ribbon (for example, Text entry etc.).
If either of the above applies, then either a Label dialog button or a dialog launcher glyph is
displayed according to this setting.
The single click label dialog changes to display a Label Dialog button.

Indicate Mandatory Selector Check Failures

NOTE: The setting is not applicable to OWA Classifier, Classifier Mail Add-in, Notes Classifier,
Mobile Classifier, or SharePoint Classifier.

When enabled, an asterisk appears alongside missing mandatory selectors in the label dialog.

Label Integrity Check Failure Error Message

NOTE: This item is only significant in very specific circumstances configured under Classifier
Support guidance.

Masking of Selectors Against Clearance

NOTE: Not applicable to Notes Classifier or Mobile Classifier.

When disabled, the selector values available will comprise all the Selector values available in the
policy.
When enabled, the selector values available will comprise only those values marked available in
the policy for which the user is cleared.

Initial value for a Masked Selector

If Select value for Masked Selector is disabled:

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 121

 Labelling Configurations / Configuration Settings

l If a default is defined and not masked, then select the default.

l If there is no default defined, then the selector value is blank.
If Select value for Masked Selector is enabled:
l If a default value is defined and not masked, then select the defined default.
l If there is no default defined, or the default is masked, then select the first available value.
l If the user opens a labelled document containing a selector value for which they are not
cleared, then the Label UI includes that existing value in the available list.

Minimise Space Between Selector Value Buttons on

Ribbon
NOTE: Checkboxes in the ribbon still appear in columns. This setting is only applicable to
Email and Office Classifier.

When disabled, selector value buttons are placed at intervals determined by the longest item in a
column.
When enabled, selector value buttons are placed next to each other on ribbon bar row to minimise
space between them.

Remove Classifier Options from the Ribbon Bar

NOTE:
l This setting has no effect under versions of Microsoft Office prior to 2010.
l Only applicable to Email and Office Classifier.
l In some circumstances the label dialog is not available (for example, there are three or
less ribbon bar selectors) and the user will not have access to the Clear and Default
actions.
l You can force Help to be displayed using the Show 'Help' button on ribbon bar.

When enabled, the Label Options menu no longer appears in the Ribbon Bar. The Clear, Default
and Help actions are available if the user invokes the Label Selection dialog.
When disabled, Classifier Label Options appear in their usual location on the Ribbon Bar.
About Classifier can be found in the Office Backstage View (Select the File tab and click
Classifier).

Select Value for Masked Selector

NOTE:
l This setting is only relevant if Masking of Selectors against Clearance is Enabled.
l Only applicable to Office Classifier.

This setting can affect the initial value displayed for a selector when Masking of Selectors against
Clearance is Enabled. It is configured by selecting Enabled or Disabled (default) from the drop
down menu available in the right hand cell.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 122

 Labelling Configurations / Configuration Settings

See description of Masking of Selectors Against Clearance on page 121 for the effects.

Show 'Help' Button on Ribbon Bar

NOTE: Not applicable to OWA Classifier, Classifier Mail Add-in, Notes Classifier, or Mobile
Classifier.

This setting defines how to access any site-defined Help displayed to the user. When enabled, a
Help button appears as a separate button above Options within the Classifier Ribbon Bar. When
disabled, a Help action appears under the Options menu in the Classifier Ribbon Bar.

Show Labeller 'Clear' Button

NOTE: Not applicable to Mobile Classifier.

This setting defines whether the Classifier Clear action appears under Classifier Label Options
(outlook only) and / or on the Label selection dialog.
When enabled, the Clear label action is available.
When disabled, the Clear label action does not appear under Classifier Label Options.

Show Labeller 'Default' Button

NOTE: Not applicable to Mobile Classifier.

This setting defines whether the Classifier Default action appears under Classifier Label Options
(outlook only) and / or on the Label selection dialog.
When enabled, the Default action is available. When disabled, the Default action does not appear
under Classifier Label Options.

Single Click Best Match

NOTE: This setting is only relevant if the current policy has Use Single Click with pre-defined
labels enabled. Not applicable to Mobile Classifier.

When disabled, the action is that a Single Click button is only highlighted if its associated label
value exactly matches the currently selected label value.
When enabled, the button with the best match (if any) to the current label value will be highlighted.
This best match is determined using the best match algorithm.
The objectives of the best match algorithm are that if a button is highlighted then all values
assigned to that button must appear in the current label, AND the only values that appear in the
current label that are not assigned to the button should be informational only. If there is more than
one exact / best match then only one button will be highlighted.
The Best match algorithm operates as follows:
If the current label exactly matches the label configured for a button, then that button is
highlighted. If there is no exact match, then look for a button that:

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 123

 Labelling Configurations / Configuration Settings

l Matches all clearance relevant selector values in the current label (Note that 'no value
selected' is significant in this situation)
AND
l For information only selectors (ones that do not have Include this selector in clearance and
attachment checks checked).
l Either the button has no value assigned for the selector OR the selector value assigned to
the button exactly matches the value selected in the label
Example:

EXAMPLE:
Consider a configuration containing three selectors: Classification, Department and Project
where the Project is informational only, and the single click buttons below are defined:
Public Public / Sales -/Sales/-
Public / Sales / Project X Internal / Board
Label Value Single Click Button Highlighted
Public Public
Public / Project Y Public
External / Engineering No match
Public / Sales / Project Y Public / Sales
Internal / Engineering No match
Public / Board No match
- / Sales / Y - / Sales / -
NOTE: In the last case, no value selected for Classification is significant.

Summary Bar Size Changes are Preserved

NOTE: Only applicable to Office documents.

When disabled, each new instance of a Classifier application will show the Summary bar, and the
user may alter the size of the Summary bar for that instance only.
When enabled, the user may alter the size of the Summary bar (or Close), and the setting is
remembered.

Summary Marking as Black Text on a White Background

NOTE: Not applicable to OWA Classifier, Notes Classifier, or Mobile Classifier.

This setting operates in conjunction with the Custom format for Summary Markings.
When disabled, the Marking format and Selector value colour settings are used when displaying a
Summary Marking.
When enabled, all Marking format and Selector value colour settings are ignored, and the
Summary Marking displayed will appear as Black text on a White background.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 124

 Labelling Configurations / Configuration Settings

Text Displayed When A Distribution List Fails to Expand

NOTE: This setting is only relevant to Email and OWA Classifier, and Mail Add-in.

Unusual conditions may arise where Classifier is unable to expand a Distribution Group when
performing Check clearance for attachments, recipients, or originator rules.
Classifier will prompt the user proffering a Policy check the dialog with a Back choice and
depending upon the Warn / Fail setting a Continue choice.
The dialog includes text summarising the condition. By default, this will be:
Failed to expand the distribution list. Please contact your administrator.
This default text may be replaced by site defined text via this setting. The setting is configured via
the drop-down list in the right-hand column.
When disabled, selecting the blank entry Disables the setting (the default text is displayed).
When enabled, selecting a User Message from the list displayed Enables the setting and will
replace the default text with the text defined by the User Message.

Text Displayed when Attachment Check Failed to

Complete
NOTE: This setting is only relevant to Email, OWA and Notes Classifier.

Classifier may be unable to complete configured Check for the high-water mark rules ( Check
rules ). Classifier will then prompt the user proffering the Policy check dialog with a Back choice
and depending upon the 'Warn' / 'Fail' setting a Continue choice.
The dialog includes text summarising the condition - by default this will be:
If the Rule is set to Prevent:
l The following attachments have a higher label than that of this message.
l Click Remove to delete these attachments or Back to return to the message.
If the Rule is set to Warning:
l The following attachments have a higher label than that of this message.
l This default text may be replaced by site defined text via this setting.
l The setting is configured via the drop-down list in the right-hand column.
When disabled, selecting the blank entry disables the setting (the default text is displayed).
When enabled, selecting a User Message from the list displayed enables the setting and will
replace the default text with the text defined by the User Message.

Text Displayed when Folder View Labelling Fails

NOTE: Only applicable to Email and OWA Classifier.

This setting is only relevant if the Outlook or OWA setting Allow Folder View labelling is Enabled .

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 125

 Labelling Configurations / Configuration Settings

The setting defines the text to be displayed to the user if an attempt to set or modify a label on an
item in a folder fails (for example, because the user does not have the necessary permissions to
the item).

Text Displayed when Originator Check Failed to

Complete
NOTE: This setting is only applicable to Email and OWA Classifier.

Classifier may be unable to complete configured Check clearance for originator rules. Classifier
will then prompt the user proffering Policy check dialog with a Back choice and depending upon
the Warn / Fail setting a Continue choice.
The dialog includes text summarising the condition - by default this will be:
l an error occurred while determining whether you are cleared to send a message with the
selected label. Please contact your administrator.
This default text may be replaced by site defined text via this setting.
When disabled, selecting the blank entry Disables the setting (the default text is displayed).
When enabled, selecting a User Message from the list enables the setting and will replace the
default text with the text defined by the User Message.

Text Displayed when Prompting for a Reason for

Ignoring Policy Warnings
NOTE: Not applicable to Classifier Mail Add-in.

This setting allows you to configure the text displayed (by associating a User Message) when a
user is prompted to enter a reason for ignoring policy warnings.

Text Displayed when Recipient Check Failed to

Complete
NOTE: This setting is only applicable to Email, OWA, Notes, and Mobile Classifier.

Classifier may be unable to complete configured Check clearance for recipients rules (Check
rules). Classifier will then prompt the user proffering Policy check dialog with a Back choice and
depending upon the Warn / Fail setting a Continue choice.
The dialog includes text summarising the condition - by default this will be:
l An error occurred while clearance checking the recipients. Please contact your
administrator. This default text may be replaced by site defined text via this setting.
When disabled, selecting the blank entry Disables the setting (the default text is displayed).
When enabled, selecting a User Message from the list enables the setting and will replace the
default text with the text defined by the User Message.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 126

 Labelling Configurations / Configuration Settings

Text Displayed when RMS Protection Failed to Complete

NOTE: This setting is only relevant to Email Classifier and Office Classifier (but excluding
Project and Visio).

Classifier may be unable to complete configured Apply this RMS policy rules ( Apply rules ).
Classifier will then prompt the user proffering Policy check dialog with a Back choice.
The dialog includes text summarising the condition - by default this will be:
l Failed to apply RMS protection
This default text may be replaced by site defined text via this setting.
The setting is configured via the drop down list in the right hand column.
When disabled, selecting the blank entry Disables the setting (the default text is displayed).
When enabled, selecting a User Message from the list enables the setting and will replace the
default text with the text defined by the User Message.

Text Displayed when S/MIME Application Failed to

Complete
NOTE: This setting is only relevant to Email and OWA Classifier.

Classifier may be unable to complete configured Apply S/MIME security rules (See Setting Rules
on page 149). Classifier will then prompt the user proffering Policy check dialog with a Back
choice.
The dialog includes text summarising the condition, by default this will be:
l Failed to apply S/MIME. Ensure Email Security is configured correctly in Outlook This
default text may be replaced by site defined text via this setting.
When disabled, selecting the blank entry Disables the setting (the default text is displayed).
When enabled, selecting a User Message from the list enables the setting and will replace the
default text with the text defined by the User Message.

Text to Display for Resolution of Policy Issues

This setting can be used to modify the end user experience when Policy Check issues are
resolved via the Policy check dialog.
The default operation if this setting is disabled (blank) is summarised as follows:
l The software performs any configured policy checks.
l If any check fails a dialog is displayed including Remove / Back / and possibly Continue.
l If the Remove action is available and the user chooses Remove, and the operation
resolves all issues, the underlying operation (for example, Send / Save) does not require
any further user involvement.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 127

 Labelling Configurations / Configuration Settings

This setting defined the User Message shown in the dialog displayed after successful resolution
(for example, Remove) of Policy Check issues.
Selecting the blank entry disables the setting. Selecting a User Message from the list enables the
setting.

Text to Display if Attachment Markings are Inconsistent

NOTE: This setting is only applicable to Email, OWA and Notes Classifier, and only if you have
enabled the relevant Ensure attachment markings are consistent setting.

This setting allows you to configure the text displayed to the user if an attachment is detected with
an inconsistent marking. The check performed is as described in Ensure Attachment Markings
are Consistent on page 104 are consistent .

Text to Display if No Marking is Available

The text defined here (applicable to all Classifier applications) will appear if there is no current
label value in:
l The information bar at the bottom of a document window or an email message window if the
Show Summary Marking in task pane setting is enabled.
l The Window title for Word, Excel, and PowerPoint (not 2010/2013) subject to Show
Summary Marking in Title Bar the setting is enabled .
If there is no label defined (and this is valid in the policy), then any Markings using Message
Formats (for example, FLOT) will just include blank space for each element referenced in the
Format.

NOTE: This may be referred to as the "No Label text" and may be displayed if the document is
'unlabelled' or if the document contains Classifier label information, but with no values
selected (empty label).

URL for your Labelling Help Site

NOTE: Not applicable to Classifier Mail Add-in or Mobile Classifier.

You may use this setting (applicable to all Classifier applications) to define a link to a location that
will display label related help information to the user.
The link supplied must be a correctly formed absolute URL. Examples:
l http://www.xyz.com is a well-formed absolute URL, www.xyz.com is not. It needs a scheme
protocol specifier (http:// in this case) to be a well-formed absolute URL.
l file://products/MS/MSDN%20CD-KEYs.txt is a well formed absolute URL,
file://products/MS/MSDN CD- KEYs.txt is not. It needs proper encoding of special
characters (such as the space) to be a well formed absolute URL.

NOTE: Currently Classifier only supports http://, https:// and file:// schemes for the URLs used
in Classifier.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 128

 Labelling Configurations / Configuration Settings

The user can access to this site via the Link to site defined help action.

NOTE: While OWA Classifier supports the Help links defined in a Classifier Configuration, the
nature of OWA access may mean that a defined link is not accessible due to external access
controls (for example, additional authentication requirements).

Use Alternate Data Stream (ADS) for Visio Files

The Visio file plug-in used by Classifier applications requires the Visio application to be installed
and runs an instance of Visio when it is invoked. This is generally not sensible in File Classifier /
Classifier API / Power Classifier for Files contexts, and so by default these applications do not
process Visio files.
Enabled this setting to direct File Classifier and Classifier API to maintain labels for Visio files in
the Alternate Data Stream.

NOTE: Note: This setting takes precedence over the File Classifier Application Use Alternate
Data Stream (ADS) marking setting. Power Classifier for Files does not use this setting, but
version 3.10 supports an equivalent parameter instead. Any label set using this ADS option
will NOT be detected by the Classifier enabled Visio and vice-versa.

User Defined RMS Protection

This setting is used to control whether an Apply Ad Hoc protection option (or just theApply
Template option) is displayed when a Check for RMS protection rule fires.
When disabled, only the Apply Template option is displayed.
When enabled, both the Apply Template and Apply Ad Hoc protection options are displayed.

Label Locations
Label Locations (Marking locations) allows you to tell Classifier the (document and
email/webmail) properties that may contain label values that have not been established by
Classifier (for example, messages arriving from another organisation), and to assign relative
precedence to the different label locations. If Classifier recognises its own Classifier Label
property it always uses this as the label value for the document or email.

NOTE: You do not have to configure any Label Locations, Classifier will just treat objects that
have not been labelled by Classifier as ‘unlabelled’.

Adding an Email Label Location

Supply the label location and format for labels in emails from other organisations. Classifier will
search for these labels in list order starting at the top.
To add an Email Label Location:

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 129

 Labelling Configurations / Configuration Settings

1. From Configuration Settings, select Label Locations, and select Properties.

The Label Locations dialog opens.
2. In the Emails section, click Add Email Label Location.
The Edit Label Location Values dialog opens.
3. Select one of the following Location Types:
l X-Header: You may define multiple X-Header entries each having its own property

name (supplied as the Parameter value - that is, your header location). If an SMTP
header with that name is found its value will be assessed to see whether a Label can
be determined. If you select X-Header, enter an X-Header name.
l First Line of Text: Classifier will assess the First line of text (FLOT) in the message

body to see whether it contains a Label value.

l Last Line of Text: Classifier will assess the Last line of text (LLOT) in the message

body to see whether it contains a Label value.

l Subject: Classifier will assess the Subject (prefix and suffix) of the message to see

whether it contains a Label value.

Locations are searched in the order defined (use Up / Down to control the order) and the
first configured location found to contain a recognisable value is used to form the
email/webmail message label value.
4. Select Marking Format.
5. Click OK.
6. Click OK again.

Editing an Email Label Location

To edit an Email Label Location:
1. Open Label Locations, and in the Emails section, select Edit in the row of the Location Type
you want to edit.
2. Make any changes.
3. Click OK.

Deleting an Email Label Location

To delete an Email Label Location:
1. Open Label Locations, and in the Emails section, select Delete in the row of the Location
Type you want to remove.

Adding a Document Label Location

To add a Document Label Location:
1. From Configuration Settings, select Label Locations, then click Properties.
The Label Locations dialog opens.
2. In the Documents section, click Add Document Label Location.
The Edit Label Location Values dialog opens.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 130

 Labelling Configurations / Configuration Settings

3. Select one of the following Location Types:

l Custom Document Property: You may define multiple Custom Document Property

entries each with its own property name supplied in the Parameter field. If a custom
document property with that name is found its value will be assessed to see whether
a Label can be determined. Note that this feature is not supported by Visio.
l Document Property: You may define multiple Document Property entries each with

its own property name supplied in the Parameter field (for example, keywords). If a
document property with that name is found its value will be assessed to see whether
a Label can be determined. A set of properties is available, but not all properties are
propagated (for example, Comments is not saved in PDF files).
Locations are searched in the order defined (use Up / Down to control the order) and
the first configured location found to contain a recognisable value is used to form the
document label value. Not all locations displayed are supported by all applications.
Check the product Release Note for further information (for example, AUTOCAD
Classifier).
4. Select a Property Name.
5. Select a Marking Format.
6. Click OK.
7. Click OK again.

Editing a Document Label Location

To edit a Document Label Location:
1. Open Label Locations, and in the Document section, select Edit in the row of the Location
Type you want to edit.
2. Make any changes.
3. Click OK.

Deleting a Document Label Location

To delete a Document Label Location:
1. Open Label Locations, and in the Document section, select Delete in the row of the
Location Type you want to remove.

Recognising and Parsing Label Markings

NOTE: Parsing of Markings in Label Locations can be problematic if some elements are
optional, or if the marking contains string selector values (date or text selectors). Setting
Marking Selector options may resolve matters.

Classifier needs to recognise and parse Markings in the following circumstances:

l When a message or document is opened and there is no Classifier Label property (for
example), Classifier will check any Label Locations defined to see whether there is a
Marking which can be used to derive a Label Value.
l When replying / forwarding messages. Classifier may need to:

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 131

 Labelling Configurations / Configuration Settings

l Recognise and remove any FLOT or LLOT on the original email and replace it with
markings matching the current label.
l Recognise and remove any Subject Prefix or Suffix on the original email and replace
it by a marking that matches the current label.
To facilitate marking recognition, Marking formats used for parsing must include clear unique
delimiters as part of the Marking Format definition (for example, [marking]). In addition, string
based selectors (Text entry, Date picker and Date offset) need to have Prefix and Suffix defined.

Marking Parsing
Classifier takes a string that it believes contains a Marking (determined using Marking
Recognition above) and uses the designated Label Location Marking Format (working left to right)
to determine a set of Label values (from the available Selectors) that produces that Marking.
The parsing essentially breaks the Marking into chunks that are either text or a label element, and
for label elements tries to determine the Selector value. The process allows for label elements
included in the marking format that have no value, and it also allows for the use of Alternate
Selector label values.
If the Marking contains an alternative value, then the appropriate primary Selector value is
adopted by the object label. This mechanism can be used to provide a 'mapping' between
external and internal values. For example:
Consider an organisation XYZ that internally has a Classification value of "Confidential", but
receives messages from a collaborative organisation (ABC) that may store "Sensitive" in a X-
Header (for example, X-ABC- Classification). It wishes to map Sensitive to Confidential internally.
So:
l Define the Classification value Confidential to have an alternate value of Sensitive.
l Define a Marking Format "ABC Sensitivity" that just contains the Classification label
element but with the Alternate value selected.
l Define an X-Header Label Location X-ABC-Classification and associate the ABC
Sensitivity Marking Format.

Combined Label Locations

The Label Locations feature allows you to tell Classifier the (document and email and web-mail)
properties that may contain label values that have not been established by Classifier (for
example, messages arriving from another organisation). If Classifier can derive a label from a
label location it will assume that label for the document and message. Once Classifier has derived
a label from a label location via the Label Locations feature, it doesn’t process any remaining
Label Locations.
In some circumstances, label values from external sources may be contained in multiple
properties. Combined Label Locations allows values found in multiple locations into a derived
label.
Multiple ‘combined label locations’ can be created. Each ‘combined label location’ can be
assigned a Name and Description to describe its purpose. Within each ‘combined label location’
you define the locations as per the ‘Label Locations’ feature.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 132

 Labelling Configurations / Configuration Settings

For non-Classifier labelled content, Classifier will start with the first ‘Combined Label Location’
and try and create a label using the configured locations. If a label cannot be derived, Classifier
will then move onto the next ‘Combined Label Location’, and so on. If a label cannot be derived
from any ‘Combined Label Location’, Classifier will process the standard Label Locations to see if
it can derive a label.

Adding a Combined Email Label Location

To add a Combined Email Label Location:
1. From Configuration Settings, select Combined Label Locations, and select Properties.
The Label Locations dialog opens.
2. In the Email Combined Label Locations section, click Add Email Combined Locations.
3. Enter a name and description for the Label Location.
4. Click Add Email Label Location.
5. Select one of the following Location Types:
l X-Header: You may define multiple X-Header entries each having its own property

name (supplied as the Parameter value - that is, your header location). If an SMTP
header with that name is found its value will be assessed to see whether a Label can
be determined. If you select X-Header, enter an X-Header name.
l First Line of Text: Classifier will assess the First line of text (FLOT) in the message

body to see whether it contains a Label value.

l Last Line of Text: Classifier will assess the Last line of text (LLOT) in the message

body to see whether it contains a Label value.

l Subject: Classifier will assess the Subject (prefix and suffix) of the message to see

whether it contains a Label value.

Locations are searched in the order defined (use Up / Down to control the order) and the
first configured location found to contain a recognisable value is used to form the
email/webmail message label value.
6. Select Marking Format.
7. Click OK.
8. Click OK again.

Editing a Combined Email Label Location

To edit a Combined Email Label Location:
1. Open Combined Label Locations, and in the Email Combined Label Locations section,
select Edit in the row of the Name you want to edit.
2. Make any changes. To edit the Email Label Location, see Editing an Email Label Location
on page 130.
3. Click OK.
4. Click OK again.

Deleting a Combined Email Label Location

To delete a Combined Email Label Location:

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 133

 Labelling Configurations / Policies

1. Open Combined Label Locations, and in the Email Combined Label Locations section,
select Delete in the row of the Name you want to remove.
2. Click Yes to confirm you want to remove it.
3. If you want to delete the Email Label Location, click Edit in the row of the Name you want to
edit, then in the Email section, click Delete in the row of the Email Label Lcoation you want
to remove. Click OK.

Policies
Policies are containers for rules and actions. They determine what actions occur when a
particular event happens and the specified conditions in the rule are met.

Adding a New Policy

To add a new policy:
1. From Labelling Configuration, select Policies .
2. From the Actions area, select Add a new policy.
3. Enter a Policy Name and optional description. The Policy name must be unique in the
Configuration, and cannot contain *, ? : and .
4. In the Maximum number of labels to show field, enter a value for the number of label values
to remember for each of Recently used Labels and Recently used Portion Marks.
NOTE:
l If the Maximum number of labels to show is zero, then the Recently used Labels
and Portion Marks features are disabled. The user never sees the Recent lists.
l If the Maximum number of labels to show is > zero, then the Classifier maintains
a list of the most recently used labels and Portion Marks. The entry at the top of a
list is the most Recently Used Labels or Portion Mark. The lists are maintained in
the Current User section of the registry.
l The Display of Favourites button must be enabled for this setting to be available.
See Display of Favourites Button on page 121

5. Choose how you want the default classifications to be generated. Select:

l User Selectable Default Classification if you wish users to be able to choose their

own default label rather than using the policy-defined default. If selected, a Set
current label as default option appears in the Favourites menu assuming the Display
of Favourites button is also enabled.
l Use Intelligent Default Label if you want the default label that is applicable to a new

document or email combined with any existing configured Default Label with entries
in the Default Label (Policies) section that have matching conditions attached to
them.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 134

 Labelling Configurations / Policies

NOTE:
l If the ‘User Selectable Default Classification’ feature is enabled and a user
has defined their own default label, then the User Selectable Default will
be used rather than any derived Intelligent Default.
l Using the Intelligent Default feature negates the need to duplicate policies
where the only difference between policies is the default label.
l When deriving an Intelligent Default, a Classifier product will take the
configured default label as the starting point for the Intelligent Default. It
will then determine which Default Labels have a matching condition
attached to them. These will be processed in turn, starting with the lowest
priority, and the values for each applied to the Intelligent Default label. As
the matching Default Labels are processed, any existing values that are
currently in the Intelligent Default will be replaced even if the existing value
dominates the value from the matching Default Label.
l By defining appropriate conditions on labels in the Default Label section,
you can configure different default labels as required for your organisation.
For example, you may wish to have a different default label when a user in
a ‘ Finance ’ group creates a new Excel workbook as opposed to when a
user in a ‘ Marketing ’ group creates a new PowerPoint presentation.

6. Select how the user can choose a label:

l Use Assisted Labelling - see Label Selection Dialog - Assisted Labelling on page 24.

If you do not select this check box, label selection is standard. The user sees
individual drop- down lists for each selector.
IMPORTANT: The Use Assisted Labelling setting can never be undone on a policy
once it has been set. The user interface for Assisted Labelling operates
differently between Office and OWA environments.

l Use Decision Tree - adds an extra tab to the associated policy editor and make it
available to the client. See Question Library on page 96.
l Use Single Click with pre-defined labels - adds an extra tab in the central frame that

gives access to the Single Click configuration features. The standard label selection
interface displays the available Selector values as 1 to 3 lists. You can choose to pre-
configure up to 12 label values that then appear as individual buttons in the Ribbon
Bar. The user can select individual selector values via the Classifier Label dialog box
launcher arrow. See Single Click Operation on page 21.
7. If you want to selector captions to appear, select the Show selector captions on the ribbon
bar check box. This setting is not applicable to Notes, Mail Add-in, or Mobile Classifier.
8. Because the values of some selector types can be displayed as buttons, set a value on
when to wrap the buttons. The Classifier ribbon bar can accommodate a maximum of three
rows of selector information. This setting can be used to control how Classifier wraps these
buttons within the Classifier Ribbon Bar. If this value is not set (default), then Classifier will
display the defined buttons for a selector on a single row. Each selector shown in the
Ribbon Bar will start on a new row regardless of whether Display selector values as buttons
is enabled or disabled. If there are more than three rows to appear in the Ribbon Bar (after
wrapping), Classifier reverts to the default (single row per selector), and the Classifier label

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 135

 Labelling Configurations / Policies

button displays providing access to the Label selection dialog. Standard Ribbon Bar re-
sizing actions apply, so ensure that the settings configured are appropriate for the number
of selectors and values to be displayed.
9. Select a User Interface definition as configured in the User Interface Library on page 60.
10. Select a Default Language for the user interface. This allows you to choose the Policy
Default Language to be used by the algorithm for finding the language to display to find the
correct (language related) value to display to a user. See Algorithm for finding the text to
display on page 50.
NOTE: Only visible if Allow multiple languages is enabled.

11. Click OK.

Editing a Policy
To edit a policy:
1. From Labelling Configuration, select Policies, and select a Policy.
2. Select Properties.
3. Make any necessary changes.
4. Click OK.

Copying a Policy
You can use an existing Classifier Policy as the basis for a new policy. All the existing settings will
be carried forward.
To copy a policy:
1. From Labelling Configuration, select Policies, and select a Policy.
2. Select Copy.
The copied policy appears as "copy of <policy name>'.
3. Select the copied policy and click Properties.
4. Make any necessary changes.
5. Click OK.

Deleting a Policy
NOTE: Ensure that all users are mapped (for example, through Group Policy configuration) to
a different policy before deletion.

To delete a policy:
1. From Labelling Configuration, select Policies, and select a Policy.
2. Select Delete.
3. Click Yes to confirm deletion.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 136

 Labelling Configurations / Policies

Locking/Unlocking a Policy
You can lock policies to indicate to other Classifier administrators that the Configuration cannot
be published at the moment (for example, because policy changes are incomplete).
To lock a policy:
1. From Labelling Configuration, select Policies, and select a Policy.
2. Select Lock Policy.
To unlock a policy:
1. From Labelling Configuration, select Policies, and select a Policy.
2. Select Unlock Policy.

Configuring Policy User Interface Settings

NOTE: The Style to Apply and Image To Apply options apply to the Label dialog, Policy Check
dialog, Challenge dialog, Organise Favourites dialog and Decision Tree dialog. The Caption
Placement and Tab Placement only apply to the main Label dialog.

To configure the Policy User Interface Settings:

1. Select a Policy Name, click Settings, and select the Policy User Intterace Settings tab.
2. Select a base colour for the header section of the user interface when using the Custom
Theme. The Base colour and Title colour only applies in the Custom Theme.
3. Select a caption placement - either left of top of the selector.
4. If displaying a custom image on the UI, select one from the Custom Image dropdown.
These images are stored in the Image Library. See Image Library on page 56.
5. Select an Image to apply to select which image you want to apply - Default (Classifier
Image), No image, or Custom Image (from step 4).
6. Select an image to display for selector warnings in the label dialog. If you do not select an
image, an asterisk is used. These images are stored in the Image Library. See Image
Library on page 56.
7. Enable the Show top three favourites so you can add your top three favourites as selectable
buttons on the ribbon. Use the Organise Favourites feature to put your favourites in order.
8. Select a Style to apply to have a theme for your application. You can select a Microsoft
Office Theme, a Classifier Theme, a Custom Theme, or a Titus theme.
NOTE: The Microsoft Office theme uses a colour scheme based on the active Office
Theme from active Office application. This only applies when using Microsoft Office
Applications.

9. Select a tab placement - either on the top or on the left on the tab pages.
10. From the Time before tooltip is displayed dropdown, if you are using speech recognition
software, you can indicate how much time lapses in seconds when you hover your mouse
over an item and when the tooltip displays. This allows the software to read the details of
the active control before displaying its tooltip.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 137

 Labelling Configurations / Policies

11. Select a Title colour for the description text in the header section of the user interface when
using the Custom Theme.
12. From the Tooltip display duration time, indicate how long a tooltip remains on screen, in
seconds, unless you move your mouse.
13. Click OK.

Configuring Suggested Classification Settings

This tab allows you to configures the ability to run a suggested classification on demand. More
information can be found in Suggested Classification on page 158.

NOTE:
l Suggested classifications are usually triggered by an appropriate ‘Check for a
suggested classification’ rule but enabling ‘User-Driven Suggested Classification’
allows the user to trigger the Suggested Classification manually by selecting a button
from the Office Ribbon Bar or from within the Classifier Labeller User Interface.
l For the feature to be available in a client that supports user-driven suggested
classification, the setting to ‘Allow user driven suggested classification’ needs to be
enabled and appropriate messages selected for all possible outcomes.
l If a suggested classification check is performed manually, the result of the check will be
displayed in the standard Classifier Policy Check dialog with the appropriate configured
message.
l A ‘Check for a Suggested Classification’ rule is not required for User Driven Suggested
Classification to function since this manual method of performing a check for
suggested classification works against the suggested classification configuration. Any
configured ‘check for a suggested classification’ rules will function as they normally
would regardless of whether this feature is enabled or not.

To configure the Suggested Classification Settings:

1. Select a Policy Name, click Settings, and select the Suggested Classification Settings tab.
2. Enable Allow user driven classfication to allow the user to trigger a suggested classification
check.
3. Select a Text to display when a suggestion cannot be found.
4. Select a Text to display when a suggestion cannot be resolved. This can happen when
multiple clashing suggestions are applicable.
5. Select a Text to display when a suggestion can be found.
6. Click OK.

Defining Selectors and Values for Policies

You can define and manage Selectors and Values for policies. You can also:
l View or change the properties of a Selector in a policy such as replacing the Caption or
Tooltip defined in the Selector library for this policy, and (Selector) Values

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 138

 Labelling Configurations / Policies

l Make a Selector available or unavailable in the policy using Selectors in policy, and
configure whether they appear on the Ribbon or the general Label Selection dialog; and
whether the Label Selection dialog is configured to display the selectors across a number of
Tabs.
l Control the Selector Values available in the policy and the default values.
l Assisted Labelling may be configured using Connect Selectors - Assisted Labelling .
l If Use Single Click with pre-defined labels is enabled, manage the associated interface
through the Single Click tab.
l Switch the view to show the settings associated with a particular Language

Setting a Selector
When a new Policy is created, it will have no Selectors assigned (unless it was established using
the Copy Policy action). Ensure you have selectors added in the Selector Library. See Selector
Library on page 67. When configuring a policy, you need to control the selectors that are relevant
to the policy. Setting a selector allows you to add or remove selectors to/from a policy, and
configure whether they appear on the Ribbon or the general Label Selection dialog, and whether
the Label Selection dialog is configured to display the selectors across a number of Tabs.
Other selectors defined in the selector library that relate to (for example) externally defined label
elements may still be recognised and displayed.
To set a selector to a policy:
1. From the Navigation tree, select Labelling Configuration > Policies > policy name.
2. Ensure the Set Selectors tab is open.
3. In the Actions pane, select Selectors in policy.
4. Pick a Selector Name and click Add >>.
The Selector name moves to the Selectors in policy section.
5. In the Selectors in policy section, pick a tab. See Adding Tabs on page 140.
6. If you want the selector to appear in the Ribbon, select the Ribbon checkbox.
NOTE: If your selector type is Text Entry or Date Picker, the checkbox does not appear.

7. If you have a label value that is part of a different policy, but you want the value retained,
click the Retained checkbox. For exampoke if an email message or document is received
containing a Selector value that is recognised in the selector library, the value is displayed if
the selector is included in a Marking Format, even if it is not related to an Active selector. If
you use an existing label containing such a (non-active) selector value as the basis for a
new object (for example, Reply to a received email message) the label value will be
dropped from the new label. Another scenario is if a selector is no longer active, but the
selector settings are to be retained in rules in the policy.
NOTE: Your Marking Formats may include such Retained Selectors so that Summary
Markings would still show any defined value. By default, non-Active selectors are NOT
propagated to new Documents or email messages.

8. Click OK.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 139

 Labelling Configurations / Policies

Adding Tabs
By default, the general Label selection dialog shows all selectors configured for the current policy.
You may wish to group the selectors to reflect their usage by defining one or more tabs, and
configuring which selectors appear on each tab.
To add a tab:
1. From the Navigation tree, select Labelling Configuration > Policies > policy name.
2. Ensure the Set Selectors tab is open.
3. In the Actions pane, select Selectors in policy.
4. Click Tabs.
5. Click New.
6. Enter a tab name and click OK.

Editing Captions and Tooltips

To edit captions and tooltips:
1. From the Navigation tree, select Labelling Configuration > Policies > policy name.
2. Ensure the Set Selectors tab is open, and click a selector.
3. In the Actions pane, select Edit Properties.
4. In the General tab, select a Language. You only need to define Language specific values if
the algorithm defined in Languages would not yield a suitable value from another
configured Language. See Languages on page 49 for more information.
5. Either enter caption text or select Use caption from Selector Library checkbox.
6. Either enter tooltip text or select Use ToolTip from Selector Library checkbox..
7. Click OK.

Editing Selector Options

The options displayed depend upon the selector type.
To edit selector options:
1. From the Navigation tree, select Labelling Configuration > Policies > policy name.
2. Ensure the Set Selectors tab is open, and click a selector.
3. In the Actions pane, select Edit Properties.
4. Select the Options tab.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 140

 Labelling Configurations / Policies

If you are then:

editing
options
for:
Single 5. Select one or more values as defined in the Selector Library
Selection that are available in the current policy.
List 6. Specify a default value.
7. In the Use names from dropdown, pick a name to display to
the user for this policy. Classifier applications will then display
the relevant value from the selected Use names from
property. If there is no value configured for that property, then
Classifier will use the selector name.
8. From the Show value as dropdown, choose how the selector
appears if Use Single Click with pre-defined labels is disabled
- either Text, Colour and text, and Image and text. If Single
click with pre-defined labels is enabled, this setting is ignored.
9. From the Display style dropdown, select how the values will
appear in the Ribbon (if a Single selection list selector or
multiple selection list is configured to appear in the Ribbon).
10. Select the Allow users to filter selector values checkbox to
allow users to type in text to filter selector values in a list.
11. Click OK.
Multi 5. Specify which of the values defined for the selector are
Selection available in the current policy. The Default column allows you
List to specify none, one, or more default values.
6. In the Use names from dropdown, pick a name to display to
the user for this policy. Classifier applications will then display
the relevant value from the selected Use names from
property. If there is no value configured for that property, then
Classifier will use the selector name.
7. From the Show value as dropdown, choose how the selector
appears - either Text, Colour and text, and Image and text.
8. From the Display style dropdown, select how the values will
appear in the Ribbon (if a Multiple selection list selector is
configured to appear in the Ribbon).
9. Select the Allow users to filter selector values checkbox to
allow users to type in text to filter selector values in a list.
10. Click OK.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 141

 Labelling Configurations / Policies

If you are then:

editing
options
for:
Date 5. Select either no default or pick a default date for the policy
Picker either using a time period or a specific date.
6. When a Favourite or Recent label is applied that contains this
selector, then select which date to use.
7. Click OK.
Text Entry 5. Enter the default text.
6. Click the Enable auto-complete checkbox if you want
Classifier to display previously-used values that match what
the user types to assist completing the value.
7. Click OK.
Data Offset 5. Specify which of the values defined for the selector are
List actually available in the current policy.
6. Select a Default Date Period.
7. From the Use Names from dropdown, select which of the
names configured for a selector will be displayed to the user in
this policy. Classifier applications will then display the relevant
value from the selected Use names from property. If there is
no value configured for that property, then Classifier will use
the Selector Name.
8. Click OK.

Connecting Selectors
Assisted Labelling allows you to guide user selection of label values by limiting the choices of
selectors and / or selector values depending upon the value chosen for a preceding selector.
A policy is either an Assisted Labelling Policy or not as determined by whether the Use Assisted
Labelling option is checked on the policy properties. If the option is checked then the Connect
Selectors Tab appears if the policy is selected; initially showing the root of the Selector sequence
tree.

NOTE: Once a policy has been set as an Assisted Labelling policy, it cannot be reverted to a
standard (Non-Assisted) Labelling policy.

All the standard policy management features apply, including defining the selectors and values
that are available in the policy (for example, Selectors in policy and Edit Selector). The only
difference is that the Connect Selectors Tab allows you to construct a dependency tree.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 142

 Labelling Configurations / Policies

NOTE: Until you start to populate the Selector Sequence Tree, the effects of using the policy
may be indeterminate in terms of any label selection displayed, default values and rule
operation.

You start to build the Selector Sequence tree by adding a Selector at the root. This selector is the
user's first choice.
Keep in mind the following:
l the Selector Order defined in the Configuration is strictly enforced. Therefore, if one branch
of the tree adds a third selector defined below a value for the first selector (essentially
omitting the second selector), the second selector cannot then be added further down.
l you cannot add a selector below a Multiple selection list value.
l mandatory selector rules, that demand a value for a selector that is not visible, should be
avoided because the associated rule will always fail.
l the default values defined in the policy selectors are ignored in the Assisted Label
connected selectors. Only default values configured in the connected selector are visible in
the client.

Adding a Selector to Selector Sequence

1. From the Navigation tree, select Labelling Configuration > Policies > policy name.
2. Open the Connect Selectors tab.
3. In the Actions pane, select Add a selector.
4. Pick a selector and click Add.
NOTE: If you want to add more nodes, either select Selector Sequence or click a node
and select Add a selector.

Removing a Selector from the Selector Sequence

1. From the Navigation tree, select Labelling Configuration > Policies > policy name.
2. Open the Connect Selectors tab.
3. Select a selector.
4. In the Actions pane, select Remove selector.
5. Click Yes to confirm the deletion. Any nested selectors are also removed.

Editing Selector Property Options

For information on setting captions and tooltips, see Editing Captions and Tooltips on page 140.
1. From the Navigation tree, select Labelling Configuration > Policies > policy name.
2. Open the Connect Selectors tab.
3. Select a selector.
4. In the Actions pane, select Edit selector options.
5. Click the Options tab.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 143

 Labelling Configurations / Policies

If you are then:

editing
options
for:
Single 6. Select one or more values as defined in the Selector Libary
Selection that are available in the current policy.
List 7. Specify a default value.
8. In the Use names from dropdown, pick a name to display to
the user for this policy. Classifier applications will then display
the relevant value from the selected Use names from
property. If there is no value configured for that property, then
Classifier will use the selector name.
9. From the Show value as dropdown, choose how the selector
appears if Use Single Click with pre-defined labels is disabled
- either Text, Colour and text, and Image and text. If Single
click with pre-defined labels is enabled, this setting is ignored.
10. From the Display style dropdown, select how the values will
appear in the Ribbon (if a Single selection list selector or
multiple selection list is configured to appear in the Ribbon).
11. Click the Retain selection if valid when parent selection
changes checkbox if the user changes the choice of a parent
selector value, any currently selected subordinate values that
are available under the new parent choice will be retained.
12. Select the Allow users to filter selector values checkbox to
allow users to type in text to filter selector values in a list.
13. Click OK.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 144

 Labelling Configurations / Policies

If you are then:

editing
options
for:
Multi 6. Specify which of the values defined for the selector are
Selection available in the current policy. The Default column allows you
List to specify none, one, or more default values.
7. In the Use names from dropdown, pick a name to display to
the user for this policy. Classifier applications will then display
the relevant value from the selected Use names from
property. If there is no value configured for that property, then
Classifier will use the selector name.
8. From the Show value as dropdown, choose how the selector
appears - either Text, Colour and text, and Image and text.
9. From the Display style dropdown, select how the values will
appear in the Ribbon (if a Multiple selection list selector is
configured to appear in the Ribbon).
10. Click the Retain selection if valid when parent selection
changes checkbox if the user changes the choice of a parent
selector value, any currently selected subordinate values that
are available under the new parent choice will be retained.
11. Click the Always include this selector's values when the
parent has multiple selections checkbox if you want the label
to always include the values when the parent has multiple
selections.
12. Select the Allow users to filter selector values checkbox to
allow users to type in text to filter selector values in a list.
13. Click OK.
Date 6. Select either no default or pick a default date for the policy
Picker either using a time period or a specific date.
7. When a Favourite or Recent label is applied that contains this
selector, then select which date to use.
8. Click OK.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 145

 Labelling Configurations / Policies

If you are then:

editing
options
for:
Text Entry 6. Enter the default text.
7. Click the Enable auto-complete checkbox if you want
Classifier to display previously-used values that match what
the user types to assist completing the value.
8. Click the Retain selection if valid when parent selection
changes checkbox if the user changes the choice of a parent
selector value, any currently selected subordinate values that
are available under the new parent choice will be retained.
9. Click OK.
Data Offset 6. Specify which of the values defined for the selector are
List actually available in the current policy.
7. Select a Default Date Period.
8. From the Use Names from dropdown, select which of the
names configured for a selector will be displayed to the user in
this policy. Classifier applications will then display the relevant
value from the selected Use names from property. If there is
no value configured for that property, then Classifier will use
the Selector Name.
9. Click the Retain selection if valid when parent selection
changes checkbox if the user changes the choice of a parent
selector value, any currently selected subordinate values that
are available under the new parent choice will be retained.
10. Click OK.

Configuring the Decision Tree

The Decision Tree Editor serves to provide a starting point for the Administrator to add questions.
It also provides a Properties option to control the layout of the Decision Tree dialog on the
client.You can enable the Decision Tree Functionality under the Labelling Configuration Policies
area. When a user selects this option, then it will add a Decision Tree tab to the policy editor.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 146

 Labelling Configurations / Policies

NOTE:
l Depending on a per-policy option, this new tab is displayed or hidden.
l The Administrator must define a list of questions in the 'Question Library.' For more
information, see Question Library on page 96.
l A different Decision Tree may be defined for each configured Policy.
l The following events related to the Decision Tree are recorded in the Windows Event
Log:
l User Guidance Dialog – Active

l User Guidance Dialog – Classification cleared

l User Guidance Dialog – Classification changed

l User Guidance Dialog – Classification selection accepted

l User Guidance Dialog – Classification selection cancelled

Enabling the Decision Tree Functionality

To enable the Decision Tree:
1. Go to Labelling Configuration > Configuration Name > Policies > Policy name.
2. In the Action Pane, select Properties.
3. Under Help the user chooses a label, select Use Decision Tree.
4. Click OK.

NOTE: The availability of menu items depends on the selected tree node. Only a single label
node may be added per answer.

Only a single label node may be added per answer. The Label menu item will then be greyed out
and the Properties menu item used to edit the label. When a node is selected then the relevant
operations will enabled for the selected item.

Adding a Question to the Decision Tree

To add a node:
1. From your policy, select the Decision Tree tab.
2. Right-click Decision Tree, and click Add.
3. Select a question, and click OK.
You can add a question as a child node to another question. To do so:
1. Right-click a question, and click Add.
2. Select a question, and click OK.

Removing a Question or Answer from the Decision Tree

To remove a question or answer node:
1. From your policy, select the Decision Tree tab.
2. Right-click a question or answer from the Decision Tree, and click Remove.
3. Click Yes to confirm you want to remove this node.
If the node you are removing has child nodes, those child nodes are also deleted.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 147

 Labelling Configurations / Policies

Editing Available Answers

A user can select an answer that will be available in the policy. By default, all answers will be
enabled when a question is added to the tree.

NOTE: The display style will depend on whether the question has been defined in the Question
Library as single or multi-select.

To edit a question in the Decision Tree:

1. Right-click a question node, and click Edit.
2. Select the answers that will be available in the policy.
3. In the dropdown list, select the display style.
4. Click OK.

Setting a Label
A label can be set for an Answer Node is selected in the Decision Tree.

NOTE: You can only change labels to multi-select answers that are processed from the first
answer until the last.

To set a label:
1. From the Decision Tree, right-click an answer, then click Edit.
The actual content of the Classification window that appears will depend on your
configuration.
2. Select options as needed.
3. Click OK.

Configuring Single Click

Single Click enables you to associate pre-defined labels with buttons on the client.
You must have the Single click with pre-defined label enabled to see the Single Click tab in the
Policy.

NOTE: Single Click and Assisted Labelling can be used together, but you will not be able to
configure Single Click until you have added at least one selector under the Connect Selectors
Tab. Changing a policy name that has been deployed invalidates any instances of that name
set through Group Policy configuration. Changing the description will have no side effects.

The standard label selection interface displays the available Selector values as 1 to 3 lists.
You can choose to pre-configure up to 12 label values that then appear as individual buttons in
the Ribbon Bar. The user can select individual selector values via the Classifier Label dialog box
launcher arrow.

Enabling the Single Click Functionality

To enable the Decision Tree:

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 148

 Labelling Configurations / Policies

1. Go to Labelling Configuration > Configuration Name > Policies > Policy name.
2. In the Action Pane, select Properties.
3. Under Help the user chooses a label, select Use Single Click with pre-defined labels.
4. Click OK.

Editing pre-defined labels

To enable the Decision Tree:
1. Go to Labelling Configuration > Configuration Name > Policies > Policy name.
2. Click the Single Click tab.
3. Select a label and click Edit pre-defined labels.
4. On the Pre-Defined Labels dialog, select a Not visible button and select the Show this
button on the client checkbox.
5. Click the Label button.
6. Pick and configure a tab as configured in Adding Tabs on page 140. Click OK.
NOTE: If you want to clear the settings, click the Clear button.

7. In the drop-down box, select the language. See Languages on page 49.
8. Enter the caption text that will appear on the button.
9. Enter the text for the tooltip on the button.
10. Select a Button display option:
l Caption only: only the configured caption is displayed.

l Show colour: it will display a colour block. By default, the colour is taken from the

Selector value configuration setting. To select a specific colour, in the drop-down

menu, select the preferred colour block. A solid colour block (16*16) will appear in
front of the caption.
l Show image: the selected image appears in front of the caption. An image may be

selected in the drop-down menu provided which will display all the configured images
that have been placed in the Image Library . The image will be scaled to fit within the
16*16 space.
NOTE: Click the Clear button to clear the values.

11. Click OK.

Setting Rules
Classifier uses Rules to control the operations performed by individual applications. Each rule
applies to a single application. It is only the effect of Rules that end users see; the Rule is defined
by Administrators.
Rules apply to a single Policy. If you need to support multiple policies using similar rules it may be
useful to establish the first Policy and then use the Copy (Policy) mechanism to establish initial
rules for the second Policy that may then be edited to achieve the required effects.
The set of Rules supported varies across individual applications. The complete list of rules
supported by the various applications can be found in Rules supported. The rules supported fall
into three general types:

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 149

 Labelling Configurations / Policies

l Add rules which cause a Marking or Meta-data to be added to a message or document.

l Apply rules which apply a setting to a message or document.
l Check rules that check some aspect of site policy and involve the user if the policy is
contravened.
Each Rule definition comprises:
l Name: A name that is unique in the Labelling Configuration. This value may appear in audit
messages.
l Application: One of the applications that Classifier supports (Microsoft Excel, Outlook,
PowerPoint, Project, Visio, Word, OWA or Notes etc.).
l Label condition: The Rules are organised as a tree which displays the rules as a hierarchy
under nodes (Always , No Label and Any Label nodes) with the most generally applicable
rules at the top (under Always) and the most specific rules (in label value terms) towards
the bottom and right.
Rules that perform policy checks allow you to check various aspects of a user's actions against
your site policy, and to alert the user if the policy check fails. For example,
l Check these mandatory selectors. Warn user if check fails with this message. (All
applications.
l Check number of recipients does not exceed number. Warn user if check fails with this
message. (Outlook and OWA).
l Rule options: Zero, one or two Rule options that supply any variable aspects of the rule
such as those highlighted in the Action examples above.
l Label value: This defines the label value(s) to which the rule applies. When a rule is created
you choose at the outset whether it applies Always (that is, regardless of the current label
value); when there is specifically NoLabel selected; to Any label (that is, there is a label
value but specific settings are not relevant); or to a specific configurable label value.
l Prerequisite conditions: These are optional and are not applicable to OWA rules.
Prerequisite conditions may be defined such that the rule is only applicable if the
prerequisite conditions are satisfied. It is possible to define two rules for the same
application at the same point in the rules tree. This potential conflict is resolved by the rule
highest up the tree taking preference (see Rule Up / Down).

Adding a Rule
Office, Email, OWA, Mail Add-in, Notes, and Mobile Classifier allow Markings and/or Metadata
based on the current label value to be applied to the current document / message.
Any Marking defined through these mechanisms overwrites any existing value in the same
location defined by any other means (for example, the user).

NOTE:
Any rich text formatting specified in a Format is ignored when used in a location that does not
support such features (for example, Subject field).
If your site uses Word templates to set Header/Footers etc. you may find that Insert Marking
as Field Code (Word only) is more appropriate for Word than some of the rules below.

To add a rule:

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 150

 Labelling Configurations / Policies

1. Go to Labelling Configuration > Configuration Name > Policies > Policy name.
2. Click the Set Rules tab.
3. Choose at the outset where it resides in the tree by selecting a node from the tree. The
selected node can be one of the following:
l Always: A rule inserted here is applied regardless of the label value (includes No

Label) unless there is a more specific rule (lower down the tree) that takes
precedence.
l No Label: The rule will only be applicable if there is no label value selected (all

selectors are blank). There are no rules associated with this node in the example
below.
l Any label: There is a label value defined (it does not match a No label rule) but

specific selector values are not relevant.

4. Choose Add a Rule.
5. Select an application, and click Next.
The list of applications shown depends on your license.
6. Select a filter rule category (Add, Apply, or Check), and select a rule relevant to your
application. Click Next.
NOTE: If you have selected multiple applications, the list of rules shown are those
common to the applications.

7. Enter a rule name or leave the default. The name must be unique.
8. Click the hyperlinks in the rule parameters to configure them. See Setting Rule Parameters
on page 151
9. Select the hyperlink in the Edit rule prerequisite conditions to set it or change it.
10. Click OK.
NOTE: Click the Back button any time to change your selections. If you inadvertently
add a duplicate rule at the same point in the rule tree, the wizard will warn you, but will
establish the new rule. However, a rule with prerequisites defined is not a duplicate of a
rule without prerequisites defined.

Setting Rule Parameters

When you are adding a rule, you can define parameters based on the rule name. When you select
a hyperlink, one of the following dialogs display based on your selection.

Dialog Description
S/MIME Operation allows you to request that S/MIME security be applied when the
message is sent.
Any label value included in the body (for example, FLOT) is
protected. A label value included as an X- Header or Subject
value is outside the data protected by signing/encrypting the
email message.
Not supported by Notes, Mail Add-in, or Mobile Classifier.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 151

 Labelling Configurations / Policies

Dialog Description
Message allows you to request that a specific message Importance
Importance property is set when a message is sent.
Not supported by Notes, Mail Add-in, or Mobile Classifier.
Message Sensitivity allows you to request that a specific message Sensitivity is set
when a message is sent
Not supported by Notes, Mail Add-in, or Mobile Classifier.
Message Expiry allows you to request that a specific expiry value is set when a
message is sent.
Not supported by Notes, Mail Add-in, or Mobile Classifier.
Label allows you to set the selector as <Any> (Selector name appears
in the label condition), Present (value is present), Not Present
(value is not present) Undefined (any valid selector value or
<Blank>), or Value (the specific value defined for the selector.
This value appears in the Label).
l For Text entry and Date Picker selectors, the presence of
a value in the rule condition renders the actual value
irrelevant.
l For Multiple selection list selectors, you can only choose
one value from those available. You can define other
(similar) rules that fire on other values of that same
selector. If several rule instances apply because more
than one value has been selected for that Multiple
selection list, the Rule overlap handling algorithm applies.
So, choosing Classification = Public / Department = <Any>
results in a label condition of “Classification"="Public”,
“Selector"="Department” being displayed in the label
condition placeholder.
l If you change the Label condition in a rule, the rule position
in the rule tree will change to reflect the new settings.
l You cannot set a label condition where all selectors are set
to Undefined; you should add the rule directly under the
Any Label node instead.
Marking format allows you to select an existing marking format from the Marking
Library. This is only supported for messages and meeting
requests.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 152

 Labelling Configurations / Policies

Dialog Description
Position allows you to set your preferred label position (either Prefix or
Suffix) relative to exisitng text. Only supported for messages and
meeting requests. A Reply/Forward operation will check for any
existing recognisable Subject marking and strip if found before
applying a Subject marking appropriate to thecurrent label.
Email Classifier may truncate the original subject to
accommodate the Prefix / Suffix. If the Prefix or Suffix is longer
than the maximum subject length, then the Prefix / Suffix is not
included in the updated Subject value.
Image allows you to insert an image. Depending on the application
selected in step 5, you can select the page (odd vs even page),
position on page, alignment relative to a margin, image
placement (in front or behind text), add image as a watermark
and enable Smart Selection (where marking is inserted in the
first available position when an image is not available).
Watermark Options allows you to control how the watermark is displayed. You can
also set its transparency. Under Word, Classifier adds an entry
to the Watermark gallery if there is an Add Watermark rule
configured applicable to the current label value. Although the
user might use this gallery entry to remove the current
watermark, Classifier will always perform any applicable rule
when the document is saved. Classifier also supports a mutually
exclusive 'Add this image as a watermark' rule to apply an image
rather than a text watermark.
Text Value allows you to add text (usually when adding an x-header). In a
Lotus Notes environment, for the x-classification to be
transmitted across an SMTP connection, classification must be
included in the Domino server list of x-headers to be transmitted
across that connection (the "x-" is automatically applied by
Domino). Any characters that are not "7 bit US-ASCII" in a
marking format that is used to populate an X- Header field on an
email generated by Email or OWA Classifier appear as'?' when
the message is sent. You might use the Alternate Value
mechanisms to provide a mapping from your selector values
(non-Ascii) to 7 bit US-ASCII and back again. See Recognising
and Parsing Label Markings on page 131. However, this
approach will not work for Text entry selector values.
Not supported by Notes, Mail Add-in, or Mobile Classifier.
SMTP Address allows you to add recipients using an SMTP address.
Entry

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 153

 Labelling Configurations / Policies

Dialog Description
Action allows you to select an action to take when a check fails. If you
select Challenge, click the Options button to select more options
to describe the User Defined Action.
User Message allows you to select a Prevent, Selector, or Warn message in
various scenarios.
PowerPoint Text allows you to assign the layout and formatting options to a text
Box Settings box.
Alignment allows you to fit a header or footer to a Placeholder (so header
or footer cannot be resized) or to a Slide (the header or footer is
resized to the width of the PowerPoint slide)
Document Property allows you to select a property to configure the rule.
RMS Policy allows you to request that a specific RMS policy be applied to a
message or document [chosen from the list displayed - empty if
none are found for the user] or, that a specific action is taken.
l All applications Remove Protection.
l For emails the policy is applied when the message is sent -
the associated RMS banner will not be visible prior to this
time.
l For documents the RMS policy is assigned whenever the
label value is changed.
l Outlook only Do not forward which will cause the
MailItem.OlPermission to be set to 1 or olDoNotForward.
Additional notes on usage of this rule can be found in Apply
RMS policy notes.
Additional considerations apply if you are using Azure RMS as
documented in Azure RMS support
Excel Cover Page allows you to create a text box within a specified range of cells.
Settings You can also choose how to size it, where to align it, what
direction the text box is displayed, and if the text box contains
borders.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 154

 Labelling Configurations / Policies

Dialog Description
Text box with When a Text Box has been inserted via the rule, the text is
Marking in Headers formatted according to the defined Marking Format. The user
or Footers can manipulate the text box (for example, moveit, format it etc).
When the rules run, if an existing Classifier 'Text Box' exists in
the header/footer, only the text (field code) is updated, and any
customisations made by the user to the box will remain. The
alignment applied from the original marking format is retained
regardless of alignments of marking formats associated with
subsequent rules applied (for example, due to label change).
This means that any changes made by the user to the text
content (for example, font, colour, size, etc.) will be lost the next
time the rule fires. For Word, this behaviour is modified if the
Marking Format has 'Use Plain Text' specified. In this case,
Classifier will replace the text content but leave any surrounding
formatting unchanged. Any formatting set by the user within the
text will still be replaced.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 155

 Labelling Configurations / Policies

Dialog Description
Advise User to let the user select the permitted changes for each selector.
You can allow multiple rules of this type. This means that if there
are duplicate rules, Classifier will action all rules including
duplicate ones. This can lead to multiple policy check dialogs
appearing. The rule can be used to limit user's ability to change
labels: to change labels on existing documents, that is if they
open an existing document that is labelled any changes to the
label are policed according to this rule, and to limit the user's
ability to change labels if using Sent or Received email or web
email messages as the basis for a new email message. Thus,
the option affects Reply to / Forwarding and Re-send actions
and limits the user’s ability to manipulate the label for the new
email message (which uses the label from the existing email
message as its initial label value). You can select:
l Any change - the user may make any change to this
selector value but the rule is not triggered. Rule success
auditing will still occur.
l No change - no change is permitted and therefore any
change to the label value for this selector will trigger the
rule and perform the prevent / warn / audit action.
l Downgrade - only appears for Hierarchic selectors and
means that the user is permitted to downgrade the value of
a hierarchic selector, any attempt to raise the value (for
example, from Public to Internal) will trigger the rule and
perform the prevent / warn / audit action.
l Upgrade - only appears for Hierarchic selectors and
means that the user is permitted to upgrade the value of a
hierarchic selector, any attempt to lower the value (for
example, from Internal to Public) will trigger therule and
perform the prevent / warn / audit action
l Additional Values - only appears for Multiple selection list
selectors indicating that the user may add additional
values but may not remove any existing values set.
l Removing values - only appears for Multiple selection list
selectors indicating that the user may remove values but
may not add additional values.
l Increase Date - only appears for Date picker or Date offset
selectors, indicating that the user can set a date / choose a
new offset that results in a date later than any currently
applied date.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 156

 Labelling Configurations / Policies

Dialog Description
l Decrease Date - only appears for Date picker or Date
offset selectors, indicating that the user can set a date /
choose a new offset that results in a date earlier than any
currently applied date.
If the Microsoft Office auto save feature is enabled in any of the
applications, the user warning messages may be displayed
when the auto save feature executes.
This dialog also appears when warning users that they are about
to view / send an item that includes a date selector item that has
expired. The check compares the date in the item classification
with the current local date. If the current local date is later than
the date in the item classification, the rule fires and the relevant
warn action taken.
Fix Option used so that (for example) the user's attention is drawn towards
the action they are about to perform or to remind them of site
process requirements they should follow prior to sending a
message or saving / printing a document. Such rules will take
effect every time a message is sent, or document is saved or
printed.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 157

 Labelling Configurations / Policies

Dialog Description
Suggested used to check aspects of the document/message (as defined by
Classification the associated conditions) and to suggest modifications to the
current Classification. If one applicable Suggested Classification
sets a value for a selector and another applicable Suggested
Classification clears that selector, then Classifier stops the
process and the defined Warn action is invoked using the
'cannot be applied' message. If one or more Suggested
Classifications are applicable, Classifier tries to apply each of
the applicable Classification settings. Classifier uses its high-
water mark algorithm to determine whether a defined selector
value should be applied. It then takes notice of any Clear
settings.

NOTE: This rule is applied before the Check mandatory

selector rule.

If the Suggested Classification includes a setting that cannot be

applied to the current Classification (for example, set a value for
a single selection non-hierarchic selector that already has a
different value defined), then Classifier stops the process and
the defined Warn action is invoked with the 'cannot be applied'
message.
You can select one of the following:
l Manually: The user is warned using the 'suggested
classification available' message.
l Automatically: Any suggested classifications that are
designated as Automatically apply will be automatically
applied (if possible) with any unprocessed suggested
classification being flagged to the user using the
'suggested classification available' message.
There is a user-driven uggested classification check which can
be configured to be run when a message is sent or a document
is saved. The suggested classification can be run on demand.
Ensure you enable this setting. See Configuring Suggested
Classification Settings on page 138.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 158

 Labelling Configurations / Policies

Dialog Description
Mandatory used to define what checks should be applied to ensure that the
Selectors label chosen meets label validity criteria, that any Selector set
as Mandatory has a value chosen.
Different rules can be defined for different applications. So a
selector may be Mandatory for documents (for example, an
archive annotation), but might be irrelevant to emails. You might
also have a label value related rule that requires a value for one
Selector only if another Selector has a particular value.

NOTE:
For more information when this rule fires for an Outlook
Show label dialog, see Show Label Dialog on Send on page
110.
A single check these mandatory selectors rule may be
defined for SharePoint which will apply to all document
types. See SharePoint Classifier Guiden for usage.
The operation of this rule is limited under CAD Classifier for
DraftSight. If a rule triggers, a warning is displayed to the
user, but the action cannot be cancelled regardless of the
buttons visible.

The rule has the form:

l Check these mandatory selectors. Warn user if check fails
with this message.
l Perform the operations common to all rules as described
in Check rules (a) (Select policy, Set rules tab, etc).
l Select these mandatory selectors, which will display you
with a dialog showing all the active Selectors available in
the policy.
l For each Selector choose Mandatory or Optional as
required.
l Assign the required Warn user and this message settings
as described in Warn / Prevent / Audit / Challenge options
for Check rules.
Numerical Value allows you to enter a value to indicate the number of characters,
for such checks as subject length cannot exceed a specified
number of characters or message size cannot exceed a
specified number of kB.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 159

 Labelling Configurations / Azure RMS Support

Dialog Description
True or False if you select True, the user can perform a task within the policy,
such as removing watermarks or images.
Content Matchers allows you to select a specified content matcher for the rule and
allows the user to review which content was identified by the
content matcher. See Matchers on page 83. Embedded images
are excluded from Outlook Content Checks.
You can allow multiple rules of this type. This means that if there
are duplicate rules, Classifier will action all rules including
duplicate ones. This can lead to multiple policy check dialogs
appearing.You can also show highlighted content matches if the
user wants to see details of the matches found. Ensure Enable
search highlights from external server is enabled in Adobe
Reader or Adobe Acrobat.

Applying RMS Policy Notes

The Apply RMS policy feature is only available if your site has an RMS (Microsoft Windows Rights
Management Services) environment configured.
Ensure that all clients are configured to use the RMS policies you have deployed before trying
Office Classifier integration. If you can apply an RMS policy from Word, Excel, Outlook, and
PowerPoint manually then the Office Classifier integration features should function.
A user may view their RMS permissions through the usual RMS View permissions action.
If the configured RMS template cannot be enabled for some reason, then the current action (for
example, email message submission) is blocked.
All RMS templates should allow programmatic access to email contents. Otherwise, issues may
arise when Outlook tries to reply to or forward a received message. For example, FLOT, LLOT
and Attachment block may not be as expected because the content of the message cannot be
processed by Classifier. [Check that the user has Access the message programmatically RMS
permission set to Yes.]
Classifier Administration queries the AD RMS Service Configuration point specified in AD and
connects to the AD RMS management web service to query the list of templates. If the web
service is accessible the RMS combo box is populated with a list of templates.

Azure RMS Support

Classifier does not currently support Managed (Department) templates.
Classifier Administration and Email and Office Classifier need to know how to locate the Azure
RMS templates.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 160

 Labelling Configurations / Azure RMS Support

1. Ascertain the required location using the Get-AadrmConfiguration PowerShell

administration tool and noting the value associated with
LicensingExtranetDistributionPointUrl .
2. Set the following registry entry to enable Classifier Administration to find the policy values
to be displayed when configuring an Apply RMS policy rule:
HKLM\Software\Wow6432Node\Microsoft\MSDRM\ServiceLocation\EnterprisePublishing
(REG_SZ) default value: <http(or https)://RMS_Cluster_Name/_wmcs/Licensing>.
(See AD RMS Service Discovery under https://technet.microsoft.com/en-
us/library/dd772753(v=ws.10).aspx for related information.
3. Classifier will first look for Azure templates under
%LocalAppData%\Microsoft\DRM\Templates . If none are found, it will check the location
configured under one of the following:
l HKCU\Software\Policies\Microsoft\Office\15.0\Common\DRM\AdminTemplatePath

HKCU\Software\Microsoft\Office\15.0\Common\DRM\AdminTemplatePath
which should contain an expandable string that points to the file store where the admin
templates are kept.

Actioning a Rule with Prerequisite Conditions

You can set a rule to action only when a prerequisite condition is met. These conditions are set in
the Condition Library. See Condition Library on page 89.

NOTE: You can define two rules for the same application at the same point in the rules tree.
This potential conflict is resolved by the rule highest up the tree taking preference (see
Rearranging the Order of Rules on page 161).

To set a rule to have a condition:

1. When creating a rule, click the There are no prerequisite conditions defined link.
2. Select The rule will be actioned only if the following conditions apply.
3. Select one or more conditions.
4. Click OK.

Rearranging the Order of Rules

You can have mulitple rules defined for the same application below the same node in the rule
tree. For example, you can have multiple rules defined for Outlook Emails in the Always node.
The Rule highest up the tree takes precedence. You can change the order of the rules by moving
them up or down.

NOTE: These actions will only be available if there is more than one rule applicable to the
application and there is a rule above (Up is available) and/or there is a rule below (Down is
available).

1. Select a rule in the rule tree.

2. Select Move rule up or Move rule down to rearrange the rules.

Editing a Rule
To edit a rule:

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 161

 Labelling Configurations / Azure RMS Support

1. Select a rule in the rule tree.

2. Click Edit Rule.
3. Make the necessary changes.
4. Click OK.

Copying a Rule
You can create a rule using another as a base. To do this, you must first copy the rule you want to
use as the base.
To copy a rule:
1. Select a rule in the rule tree.
2. Click Copy Rule.
3. Select one of the nodes: Always, No Label, or Any Label.
4. Click Paste Rule.
The new rule appears with the name: <Application name>.<Rule name: (1).
5. Click Edit Rule, and make the necessary changes, including giving it a new name.
6. Click OK.

Deleting a Rule
To delete a rule:
1. Select a rule in the rule tree.
2. Click Delete Rule.
3. Click OK to confirm the deleting of the rule.

Suggested Classification
This feature allows you to define one or more Suggested Classifications for a policy. These can
then be referenced in Check for suggested classification rules such that when a document is
saved or printed or a message is sent, the Suggested Classifications are evaluated and the
appropriate action is performed.
Each Suggested Classification has one or more Conditions defined (stored in the Condition
Library), and Selector settings that indicate either a selector value is be applied, and/or that a
selector should be cleared.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 162

 Labelling Configurations / Azure RMS Support

NOTE:
l Suggested Classification are only supported by Outlook, Word, Excel, PowerPoint,
Project, and Visio.
l You cannot specify text and date selectors in a Suggested Classification.
l Currently, suggested classifications are only triggered if you enable the ‘check for a
suggested classification and automatically apply’ rule. This change will allow the user
to trigger the Suggested Classification manually by selecting a button from the Ribbon
Bar or from within the Labeller UI.
l If you run the suggested classification manually, the suggested label will automatically
be calculated and shown in the Policy Check dialog. If we fail to suggest a label, a
message box would be displayed to inform the user, for example, "Document was set
to the suggested classification" / "Unable to determine a Classification for the
document".
l If you as the Admin have enabled the original ‘check for a suggested classification’ rule
and this new manual option was also enabled, then both will apply. So even if the user
manually triggered the suggest label, when they save, send, or print the document, the
rules will also be triggered, including the ‘check for a suggested classification and
automatically apply’ rule.
l This manual option will only be applicable to the outer labeller UI, that is, not the inner
labeller UI which can be launched from within the Policy Check dialog.
l A Policy Dialog Summary label button will be disabled when displayed from a Use
Suggested manual operation to avoid looping.

Adding a Suggested Classification

Before you can add a Suggested Classification, ensure the Check for a Suggested Classification
rule has been configured. See Suggested Classification on page 158 for more information.
To add a Suggested Classification:
1. From Labelling Configuration, select Policies.
2. Select a policy and click the Suggested Classifications tab.
3. From the Actions pane, select Add a New Classification.
4. Enter a name.
5. Click the Classification button to define which selectors are to be included, which selector
values shold be applied, and the selectors that should be cleared of any values.
6. Select your Classification and values.
7. Click OK.
Set wil show your current selectors checked and selected values
Clear will show current selectors checked but no values have been selected.
8. Choose any conditions that must be satisified for the label to be applied.
9. Select Automatically apply when possible checkbox to apply the Check for a Suggested
Classification rule. See Suggested Classification on page 158 for more information.
10. Select a Message to display when this Suggested Classification cannot be applied. This
text will be displayed in the Policy Check if (for example) there are two incompatible
selector values defined by different Suggested Classifications, or the Suggested

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 163

 Labelling Configurations / Azure RMS Support

Classification is incompatible with the current Classification.

11. Click OK.

Editing a Suggested Classification

To edit a Suggested Classification:
1. From the Suggested Classifications tab, select a classification name.
2. Click Edit Classification.
3. Make the necessary changes and click OK.

Deleting a Suggested Classification

To delete a Suggested Classification:
1. From the Suggested Classifications tab, select a classification name.
2. Click Delete.
3. Click Yes to confirm deletion.

Suggested Classification Warnings

This is a setting that prevents multiple suggested classification warnings for the same content. It
is an option to allow you to stop showing the same content warning when saving or printing a
document.

NOTE: : If enabled, the policy check result will display a checkbox to allow the user to 'Don't
show this warning again.' This check only applies to Microsoft Office Documents, it is not
applicable for Outlook.

To enable this rule:

1. From Labelling Configuration, select Policies.
2. Select a policy and click the Set Rules tab.
3. Select a rule, then click Edit rule.
4. In the rule parameters, set the Suggested Classification to Warn and the Action to Warn,
and set Allow warning to be ignored to True.
5. Click OK.

Adding Default Labels

This feature allows you to define one or more Default Labels that can then be referenced when
configuring SharePoint Classifier (3.10 or later) Library Default Label values (see the SharePoint
Classifier Guide (3.10 or later) for further details). Any Default Labels that are configured with an
associated condition can be used when deriving an Intelligent Default Label.
Each defined Default Label has a unique name and an associated classification/label.
Additionally, a condition can be assigned to the Default Label.
Default Labels are listed alphabetically.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 164

 Labelling Configurations / Azure RMS Support

Adding a Default Label

1. From Labelling Configuration, select Policies.
2. Select a policy and click the Default Label tab.
3. Select Add a New Default Label.
4. Name the label.
5. Click the Classification button and choose selectors and values for the label.
6. If you want to choose conditions to specify, click the Conditions button, choose The default
label will be applied only if the following conditions apply radio button, and select a
condition.
7. Click OK.
8. Click OK again.

Editing a Default Label

1. From Labelling Configuration, select Policies.
2. Select a policy and click the Default Label tab.
3. Select a label and click Edit Default Label.
4. Make the necessary changes, and click OK.

Deleting a Default Label

1. From Labelling Configuration, select Policies.
2. Select a policy and click the Default Label tab.
3. Select a label and click Delete.
4. Click Yes to confirm deletion.

Changing Priorities
When deriving an Intelligent Default, a Classifier product will take the configured default label as
the starting point for the Intelligent Default. It will then determine which Default Labels have a
matching condition attached to them. These will be processed in turn, starting with the lowest
priority, and the values for each applied to the Intelligent Default label. See Adding a New Policy
on page 134 You can change the priority.
To change the priority:
1. From Labelling Configuration, select Policies.
2. Select a policy and click the Default Label tab.
3. Select a label, and select either Increase Priority or Decrease Priority.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 165

 Labelling Configurations / Clearance Checks and Settings

Clearance Checks and Settings

NOTE: Clearance Settings are only relevant if your site has decided to implement the
Classifier Clearance handling features.

For a clearance check to work:

l Clearance Check Email Domains, Clearance Library, and/or Dynamic Clearances must be
enabled in order to see the nodes in the Classifier Administrator Server GUI. See
Application Settings on page 43.
l Check clearance for Attachment / recipient / originator rule must be created in your policy.
See Adding a Rule on page 150 for more information.
NOTE: For an Originator check, the Originator is determined according to the Email
Classifier setting " Use From field for Originator Clearance". By default, this will be the
identity of the Primary Mailbox; that is, the first mail box configured in the current
profile. If Dynamic Clearances are enabled, then Classifier first checks to see whether
a Dynamic Clearance for the recipient provides suitable Clearance. If no suitable
dynamic clearance is available, the algorithm will proceed domain clearance checks (if
enabled). If Clearance Check email domains is set, then perform clearance checks on
all external recipients using the appropriate email domain clearance value. For Single
selection list selectors, the label value must be permitted by the domain / recipient
clearance for the check to pass. For Permissive Multi-select selectors, the domain /
recipient clearance must include one of the values in the label for the check to pass.
For Restrictive Multi-select selectors, the domain / recipient clearance must include
ALL of the values in the label for the check to pass.

Check Attachments/Recipients/Originator with

Warn/Prevent parameters
When using this rule, keep in mind the following:
l If no Check attachment / recipients / originator rules are defined, then recipient clearances
are not checked when submitting an email message.
l If rules are defined and the originator / all recipients are cleared for information/
attachments within the current email message label, then email message submission
continues uninterrupted regardless of whether Warn or Prevent is chosen.
l If the originator or recipients fail the clearance check, then the effect is dependent upon the
Warn/Prevent or Challenge setting in the Rule definition:
l If Audit only is set, then the occurrence is audited and the email is sent but requires

no user involvement.
l If Warn, Prevent or Challenge is set, then email message is interrupted and a

warning dialog appears indicating the problem and displaying options as to how to
proceed (such as remove unapproved recipients or change unapproved message
label).

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 166

 Labelling Configurations / Clearance Checks and Settings

l If Recipient Checks are performed, then the membership of any expanded distribution
group (DG) as governed by Always use Distribution List clearance is also checked.
l For Outlook Emails only, if a member of a DG is ‘removed’ as part of the Remove action
then the DG is replaced by the expanded set of ‘cleared’ members prior to submission.

Email Domain Clearance

An Email Domain Clearance defines the clearance that should be assigned to a given email
domain address space.
If recipient clearance checking is enabled through an appropriate Check clearance for
attachments /recipients rule for Outlook, OWA or Notes, then any external recipient is checked
using an Email domain clearance that matches their email address.
The summary display shows all defined email domain clearances and the associated clearance
information in per selector columns.

NOTE: You should probably establish a domain clearance setting for your own (internal)
domain, and it may be useful to establish a default (minimal) domain clearance to handle any
recipient addresses that do not match any other configured domain clearance.

Adding a New Email Domain Clearance

NOTE: Remember to establish one or more email domain clearances to cover all your internal
users.

To add a new email domain clearance:

1. Select Labelling Configurations > Clearance Settings > Email Domain Clearance
Configuration.
2. From the Actions pane, select Add a new email domain clearance.
3. Enter an Email domain address space for the SMTP domain for which you wish to define a
clearance.
NOTE: You can establish a 'default' email domain clearance (one that matches any
addresses that do not match any other configured email domain clearance) by leaving
the Email domain field blank. The resulting entry will appear in the summary list as Any
unmatched email domains and operate as a backstop.

4. Check Include subdomains if you want the clearance to apply to all subdomains of that
address space. For example, an address space of abc.xyz with Include subdomains
checked would apply to domains with addresses of pqr.abc.xyz or lmn.abc.xyz etc.
5. Select the checkboxes for which the Label values that the domain is cleared.
6. Click OK.
The domain clearance entry will appear in the summary list pane.

Editing Email Domain Clearance

To edit the email domain clearance:

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 167

 Labelling Configurations / Clearance Checks and Settings

1. Select Labelling Configurations > Clearance Settings > Email Domain Clearance
Configuration.
2. Select an entry.
3. From the Actions pane, select Edit email domain clearance.
4. Make the necessary changes and click OK.

Deleting Email Domain Clearance

NOTE: Only applicable to SharePoint Classifier (3.10 or later).

To delete an email domain clearance:

1. Select Labelling Configurations > Clearance Settings > Email Domain Clearance
Configuration.
2. Select an entry.
3. From the Actions pane, select Delete email domain clearance.
4. Click Yes to confirm the deletion.

Clearance Library
The Clearance Library allows you to define Clearance definitions which can then be used by
Classifier SharePoint (2016) to apply clearance based control to the items being inserted into a
SharePoint (2016) library. That is, an item can only be inserted into a Library if its label is allowed
by the clearance associated with the Library.
Each defined Clearance has a Clearances Default Labels defined. Clearances are listed
alphabetically.

Adding a New Clearance

To add a new clearance:
1. Select Labelling Configurations > Clearance Settings > Clearance Library.
2. From the Actions pane, select Add a New Clearance.
3. Name the Clearance.
4. Select the checkboxes relevant to the Clearance.
5. Click OK.

Editing a Clearance
To edit a clearance:
1. Select Labelling Configurations > Clearance Settings > Clearance Library.
2. Select a clearance.
3. From the Actions pane, select Properties.
4. Make the necessary changes and click OK.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 168

 Labelling Configurations / Clearance Checks and Settings

Deleting a Clearance
To delete a clearance:
1. Select Labelling Configurations > Clearance Settings > Clearance Library.
2. Select a clearance.
3. From the Actions pane, select Delete.
4. Click Yes to confirm deletion.
NOTE: SharePoint Classifier associates the Clearance Name with a Library and then
uses that Name to access the actual Clearance from the Classifier Configuration. If the
Clearance Name cannot be found in the current Configuration, then no clearance
checks will apply to the library.

Dynamic Clearances
Dynamic Clearances allow you to define Clearances that will be determined at run time based on
User property value conditions.

NOTE: The Classifier Mail add-in only supports user property value conditions based on a
user’s SMTP address.

Such Clearance values will be used to:

l check Originator, Recipient, or Attachment Clearance
l apply Clearance Filters to the Label dialog if Masking of Selectors Against Clearance on
page 121 is enabled.
Always use Distribution List clearances is supported by Email and OWA Classifier. If the
option is disabled, then DGs are always expanded. If the option is enabled, then DG
address is used to derive a clearance (if available), otherwise the DG will be expanded to
perform clearance checks. See Always Use Distribution List Clearances on page 101

Adding a New Dynamic Clearance

NOTE: For new Classifier Configurations, Dynamic Clearances are enabled by default,
although no Dynamic Clearances are defined. You can define a Dynamic Clearance with no
associated conditions. In such cases, the Dynamic Clearance operates as a 'default
clearance' applicable to every recipient/originator.

To add a Dynamic Clearance:

1. Select Labelling Configurations > Clearance Settings > Dynamic Clearance.
2. From the Actions pane, select Add a New Dynamic Clearance.
3. Enter a name for the Dynamic Clearance.
4. Select the checkboxes relevant to the Clearance.
5. Select one or more existing conditions. These conditions are configured in the Condition
Library on page 89.
6. Click OK.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 169

 Labelling Configurations / Clearance Checks and Settings

Editing a Dynamic Clearance

To edit a dynamic clearance:
1. Select Labelling Configurations > Clearance Settings > Dynamic Clearance.
2. Select a clearance.
3. From the Actions pane, select Properties.
4. Make the necessary changes and click OK.

Deleting a Clearance
To delete a clearance:
1. Select Labelling Configurations > Clearance Settings > Dynamic Clearance.
2. Select a clearance.
3. From the Actions pane, select Delete.
4. Click Yes to confirm deletion.
l Dynamic Clearances:
ach client is started and retrieves the updated configuration information.

Clearance Checks When Sending Messages

NOTE: Only Single Selection list and Multiple selection list selectors with Include this selector
in clearance and attachment checks set are included in Clearance Checking.

The Configuration can use the policy rules:

l Check clearance for attachments (supported in Email Classifier)
l Check clearance for recipients (supported in Email, OWA, Notes, Mail Add-in, and Mobile
Classifier)
l Check clearance for originator (Email, Mail Add-in, and OWA Classifier)
Depending on the label, attachment / recipient and / or Originator clearance should be
checked if an email or web email message is sent. That is, each recipient / originator must
have permission receive / send information with the current label.
l For Single selection list selectors , the label value must be permitted by the domain /
recipient clearance for the check to pass.
l For Permissive Multi-select selectors , the domain / recipient clearance must include one of
the values in the label for the check to pass.
l For Restrictive Multi-select selectors , the domain / recipient clearance must include ALL of
the values in the label for the check to pass.

Check Attachments/Recipients/Originator - Warn/Prevent

If no Check attachment / recipients / originator rules are defined, then recipient clearances are not
checked at email message submission time.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 170

 Labelling Configurations / Clearance Checks and Settings

If rules are defined and the originator / all recipients are cleared for information/ attachments
within the current email message label, then email message submission continues uninterrupted
regardless of whether Warn or Prevent is chosen.
If the originator or recipients fail the clearance check, then the effect is dependent upon the
Warn/Prevent or Challenge setting in the Rule definition:
l If Audit only is set, then the occurrence is audited and the email is submitted but requires no
user involvement.
l If Warn, Prevent, or Challenge is set, then email message is interrupted and the sender
sees a dialog indicating the problem and how to proceed defined by the Rule.
NOTE: If Recipient Checks are performed, then the membership of any expanded
distribution group (DG) as governed by Always use Distribution List clearance is also
checked. For Outlook Emails only, if a member of a DG is ‘removed’ as part of the
Remove action, then the DG is replaced by the expanded set of ‘cleared’ members
prior to submission.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 171

 Email, OWA, Mail Add-in, Notes and Mobile Differences / Differences in Enabling and Disabling

Email, OWA, Mail Add-in, Notes and

Mobile Differences
Differences in Enabling and Disabling
l Email and Notes Classifier functionality can be enabled and disabled globally via Global
Settings / Classifier Application Settings.
l OWA Classifier functionality can only be enabled and disabled via install/remove product
actions.
l Notes and Mobile Classifier functionality can only be enabled and disabled via
install/remove product actions.
l Mail Add-in can be enabled/disabled through the manifest file.

OWA Classifier and Classifier Mail Add-in

vs Email Classifier
OWA Classifier and Classifier Mail Add-in support subsets of the features supported by Email
Classifier (Outlook) as described in:
l Classifier Application Settings
l General Settings
l Rules supported
Other differences are:
l Portion Marking in a message (nor any related Portion Marking features) is not supported
by OWA Classifier.
l Policy Test Mode capability does not extend to testing in OWA or Mail Add-in
environments.
l Mail Add-in only supports messages. Other message types (e.g. appointments) are not
supported.
l Labelling of Calendar items is only supported in OWA Premium view.
l During a Reply / Forward sequence, Email Classifier removes any existing subject
markings at the time the new message is created. Due to the environment, OWA / Mail
Add-in can only 'replace' the subject markings at the time the message is sent.
l Enable/Disable of the OWA / Mail Add-in Classifier is via server based Install/Uninstall and
License.
l Message templates are not supported by OWA / Mail Add-in Classifier.
l Assisted labelling and Environment properties in Marking Formats are supported by OWA /
Mail Add-in Classifier, but there are some differences.
The following are not supported:

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 172

 Email, OWA, Mail Add-in, Notes and Mobile Differences / Notes Classifier vs Email Classifier

l Favourites
l Portion Marks
l Document properties in Marking Formats, Content Checking.
l The Add Category to message rule is not supported by OWA / Mail Add-in Classifier: since
Folder View Labelling (Outlook) is not available, the category can only be set on Sent Items
and the feature would be incomplete.
l Whilst OWA / Mail Add-in supports the Help links defined in a Classifier Configuration, the
nature of accessing these environments may mean that a defined link is not accessible due
to external access controls (e.g. additional authentication requirements).
l The nature of the OWA / Mail Add-in environments means that checking must take place at
the Server (when the message is sent) and the error handling interactions do not always
operate quite the same as in the Outlook client. In particular, Attachment labels are not
checked until the message is sent and it is not possible to support an equivalent to the
Automatically elevate email label feature.
l The server tends to run for extended periods and changes to the configuration do not take
place in the same manner as for a client (where closing and restarting all Classifier
supported applications will ensure the latest configuration is used by a desktop client).
l The end user experience may vary in some scenarios.
l Mail Add-in: On send, Classifier add-in code is invoked and Classifier performs any checks
required. If Classifier checks pass, all configured markings are applied. Note that
subsequent checks by OWA/Mail Add- in (e.g. no recipients), or indeed other add-ins, or
user (e.g. no Subject) may cause message submission to be halted with the draft message
now showing the marking information. This is different to Email Classifier where Classifier
is invoked after Recipient / Subject checks etc.

Notes Classifier vs Email Classifier

Notes Classifier essentially supports a subset of the features supported by Email Classifier
(Outlook). The key differences are:
l Application of RMS and S/MIME security to a message is not supported by Notes
Classifier.
l Portion Marking in a message is not supported by Notes (nor any related Portion Marking
features) and attachment labels are not checked until the message is sent (there is no
Automatically elevate email label). The end user experience may vary in some scenarios as
outlined in User experience variance between Email, OWA and Notes .
l Enable/Disable of the Notes Classifier is via server based Install/uninstall and License.
l Message templates are not supported by Notes Classifier.
l Folder View labelling is not supported by Notes Classifier.
l The Favourites button is not supported under Notes 8.
l The nature of the environment means that error handling interactions does not operate
quite the same as in the Outlook client. In particular the dialogs presented if Check rules fail
(e.g. Recipient clearance or high- water mark checks) do NOT present the Fix actions (e.g.
Upgrade, Remove), the user has to rectify the anomalies.
l Only a subset of Classifier Applications Settings is supported by Notes Classifier.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 173

 Email, OWA, Mail Add-in, Notes and Mobile Differences / Mobile Classifier vs Email Classifier

l Only a subset of General Settings are supported by Notes Classifier.

l Only a subset of Rules are supported by Notes Classifier.

Mobile Classifier vs Email Classifier

Mobile Classifier supports a subset of the features supported by Email Classifier (Outlook). The
key differences are:
l Label selection presents a Single click interface - as a consequence the policy to be used
must define single click settings.
l The label of a message is presented at the top of the message body.
l Images (e.g. in Single Click buttons) are not supported by Mobile Classifier.
l UI Definitions are not supported by Mobile Classifier, so actions on dialogs such as Back
and Continue will always appear as such.
l Application of RMS and S/MIME security to a message is not supported by Mobile
Classifier.
l Portion Marking in a message is not supported by Mobile Classifier (nor any related Portion
Marking features).
l Enable/disable the Mobile Classifier via App install/uninstall on the users device, using
server based Service Install/uninstall applying License control.
l Message templates are not supported by Mobile Classifier.
l Folder View labelling is not supported by Mobile Classifier.
l The Favourites, Recently Used and Options features are not supported under Mobile
Classifier.
l The nature of the environment means that error handling interactions does not operate
quite the same as in the Outlook client. In particular the dialogs presented if Check rules fail
(e.g. Recipient clearance) do NOT present the Fix actions (e.g. Upgrade, Remove), the
user has to use Back/Continue rectify /ignore the anomalies.
l There are currently no Classifier Applications Settings specified for Mobile Classifier.
l Only a subset of the General Settings is supported by Mobile Classifier.
l Only a subset of Rules is supported by Mobile Classifier.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 174

 Deploying Configuration / Creating and Modifying the Configuration

Deploying Configuration
NOTE: If you wish to Publish the Classifier Configuration via Active Directory, the Active
Directory Schema must be updated ( see Extending the Active Directory Schema on page
205). Schema update is not required if you intend to Publish the configuration via file store.

If you want to use the optional Classifier Management Agent, install and configure it as described
in the Management Agent Guide.
The schematic below shows logically how the Classifier configuration is deployed.

Creating and Modifying the Configuration

1. The Administrator creates a configuration on a local machine and deploys it to a user
community.
2. Once the configuration is stable, the Administrator will publish the configuration to the
Master Configuration location. This can be the Active Directory or a File Store location. You
can also produce a copy of the configuration in a format suitable for retrieval from a URL
location as supported by Classifier Clients (Outlook, Word etc.) and Classifier Management
Agent.
3. If an Administrator plans to modify the Master Configuration, they must ensure their local
machine holds a current copy of the Master Configuration. See Getting an Existing
Configuration on page 34 to overwrite any existing local copies. The Administrator can then
modify the configuration and re-publish, SeePublishing the Configuration on page 35.

NOTE: If you Publish the configuration to File Store, ensure that the target (Master) location
has suitable permissions. End users should have the ability to read from that location and
Administrators, who are modify the Master configuration, must also have the ability to write to
that location using the network path.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 175

 Deploying Configuration / Retrieving the Master Configuration

Retrieving the Master Configuration

Classifier applications need to know where to find the Master Configuration and which Policy in
the Configuration should be used. All Classifier Applications determine this by searching Registry
Key settings order. See Configuration Registry Search Algorithm on page 177These registry
settings may be established either directly (see Setting the Registry Keys Directly on page 184) or
using Group Policy Option mechanisms(see Setting the Registry Keys using Group Policy on
page 186).
If Management Agent in use:
l The Management Agent retrieves the Master Configuration and checks for updates
according to its own configuration settings and Web Host Settings on page 194, if
applicable. The retrieved configuration is stored locally (in CommonConfigFolder).
l The client applications are configured to retrieve their configuration from the location written
by the Management Agent.
If the Management Agent not in use and if the applications are not using the Management Agent
(OWA Classifier etc.):
l Each Classifier application periodically retrieves the configuration from the Master location,
but only if the Master configuration version is 'later' than the local version. For Email and
Office Classifier, the Validity Period registry setting can be used to control when the check
should be performed. The retrieved configuration is stored locally unless
ClientServerOverride is enabled or the application (e.g. OWA) is operating in ServiceMode.

Classifier Registry Entry Grouping

The Registry entries relevant to Classifier operations are grouped as follows:
l Label Configuration: Policy settings to ensure that Classifier Client products (e.g. Email and
Office Classifier) will obtain their Classifier Configuration from the correct location and that
users will be assigned the correct Classifier policy (available for Local Machine and Current
User). See Label Configuration Registry Settings on page 189. Web Host settings that are
only applicable if you plan to retrieve master configuration from a URL location.
l Client Configuration: Policy settings that can be used in unusual circumstances to control
some aspects of Classifier Client operation (available for Local Machine and Current User).
See Registry Settings on page 189.
l Manually Configurable: Settings To Auto Enable Microsoft Office Header / Footer Controls
on page 199 .
l File Classifier: Policy settings available for Local Machine and Current User that can be
used to control aspects of File Classifier operation. These are only relevant if you are using
File Classifier. See File Classifier Registry Settings on page 202.
l Management Agent: Policy settings as described in the Classifier Management Agent
Guide .

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 176

 Deploying Configuration / Configuration Registry Search Algorithm

NOTE:
l OWA Classifier is configured per server, and all users of that OWA server will
operate under the Configuration and Policy used by that server.
l OWA Classifier only changes its configuration after a restart. Thus after
publishing an updated configuration, an IISRESET would be required to cause
OWA Classifier to use that new configuration.
l If you are using Group Policy mechanisms, the Client operation relies on the
Group Policy settings reaching the client. If the effects are not as expected you
should run regedit and check that the relevant entries are present. Running
GPUPDATE /Force may be of assistance. Check that the client machine is
properly recognised in the domain - removing and re-introducing the client can
resolve this issue.
l If a user is a member of more than one grouping you can use Group Policy
Resultant set of Policy (RosP) to establish the configuration they will actually get
(i.e. the Classifier Policy they will use).

Configuration Registry Search Algorithm

Each Classifier application / service context (e.g. Email or Office Classifier, OWA Classifier, etc.)
looks for relevant configuration registry settings below various locations in the registry.

Client Registry Locations

NOTE:
l Power Classifier for files and Power Classifier for SharePoint also provide support for
their own ServiceMode settings as documented in Power Classifier for Files Guide and
Power Classifier for SharePoint Guide.
l Application specific settings can be found in similar locations with ConfigManager
replaced by the application name (e.g. HKEY_LOCAL_
MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Policies\Boldon James\ File Classifier ).
l For 64-bit machines that are to run 32-bit Classifier applications (e.g. Email Classifier
and Office Classifier), item 3 above would need registry keys establishing under
HKEY_LOCAL_ MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Boldon
James\ConfigManager.

This covers the Classifier Applications:

l Email and Office Classifier
l Notes Classifier
l File Classifier
l CAD Classifier
l Power Classifier for files
l Power Classifier for SharePoint.
Each will look for the configuration registry settings:

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 177

 Deploying Configuration / Configuration Registry Search Algorithm

l ClientServerOverride
l LabelConfiguraiton
l Policy
l PolicyFileClassifier
l PolicyOutlook
l ServerFileSystemRoot
l ServerRootType
l UseWebServer
l ValidityPeriod
in the following registry locations in the order shown:
l HKEY_CURRENT_USER\ SOFTWARE\Policies\Boldon James\ConfigManager
l HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Policies\Boldon James\ConfigManager
l HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Boldon James\ConfigManager

Classifier Service Registry Locations

This topic covers the Classifier Applications: OWA Classifier, Classifier Reporting, SharePoint
Classifier, Classifier Management Agent.

NOTE:
l If more than one service (OWA Classifier, SharePoint Classifier, etc.) is installed on a
single system, they will all use the same registry settings. For these services, use of
ServiceMode (items 1 or 2 below) is recommended as it ensures separation of registry
key usage by these services and other Classifier applications (e.g. Email and Office
Classifier) running on the same system.
l For 64-bit machines that are to run 32-bit Classifier applications (e.g. Management
Agent), items 2 and 4 above would need registry keys establishing under:HKEY_
LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Boldon
James\ConfigManager\ServiceMode or HKEY_LOCAL_
MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Boldon James\ConfigManager.

Each will look for relevant registry settings (Blank = Not used by that service):

Setting OWA Reporting SharePoint ManagementAgent

(32-bit)
LabelConfiguration Y Y Y
Policy Y Y Y
ServerFileSystemRoot Y Y Y Y
ServerRootType Y Y Y Y
UseWebServer etc. Y

Below the following registry locations in the order shown:

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 178

 Deploying Configuration / Registry Key Requirements

l HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Policies\Boldon
James\ConfigManager\ServiceMode
l HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Boldon James\ConfigManager\ServiceMode
l HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Policies\Boldon James\ConfigManager
l HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Boldon James\ConfigManager

Exchange Classifier Registry Locations

Exchange Classifier looks for the following configuration registry settings:
l LabelConfiguration
l ServerFileSystemRoot
l ServerRootType
It searches the following locations in the order shown:
l HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Policies\Boldon
James\ConfigManager\ExchangeServiceMode
l HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Boldon
James\ConfigManager\ExchangeServiceMode See Exchange Classifier Guide > Classifier
Routing Agent for further information.

Classifier Administration Registry Locations

Classifier Administration uses the following registry location to store the last published to location:
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\SOFTWARE\Boldon James\ConfigManager.

Registry Key Requirements

The Classifier Clients (Email and Office Classifier, File Classifier etc.) rely on registry keys in
order to work correctly. These registry keys tell the Classifier Clients where to find the
configuration and which policy to use.
For more detailed information about registry keys and entries see the Classifier Registry Keys
Deployment and Troubleshooting Guide.

Environmental Requirements
l Windows OS architecture (32 or 64-bit)
l Client application architecture (32 or 64-bit)
l Configuration store type (AD, File Store or Web Server)
l Path / URL for the configuration (If using File Store or Web Server)
l Classifier Configuration Name
l Classifier Policy Name Registry Setting Locations

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 179

 Deploying Configuration / Registry Key Requirements

NOTE:
When the same key is specified in multiple locations the highest location from the list
below will be used. Locations including `under the Policies subtree’ are typically set via
Group Policy and should not be manually updated.

l Classifier Registry Settings can be added to any of the following locations: HKEY_
CURRENT_USER\SOFTWARE\Policies\Boldon James\ConfigManager*
l HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Policies\Boldon James\ConfigManager*

HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Boldon James\ConfigManager†
When using 32-bit client applications on a 64-bit Operating System, the registry settings
need to be placed under the equivalent Wow6432Node: HKEY_LOCAL_
MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Boldon James\ConfigManager
If a customer’s environment consists of 64-bit OS machines running a 32-bit version of
Microsoft Office, the following should be considered when deploying File Classifier 64-bit
and Email and Office Classifier 32-bit. To ensure both applications are covered, the registry
keys should be created under one of the three sets:
File Classifier will use the 64-bit location and Email and Office Classifier will use location.
Note: The HKLM\SOFTWARE\Policies area is shared by both 32 and 64-bit applications.
l HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Policies\Boldon James\ConfigManager

l HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Boldon James\ConfigManager

l HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\WOW6432Node\Boldon

James\ConfigManager
l HKEY_CURRENT_USER\SOFTWARE\Policies\Boldon James\ConfigManager

l HKEY_CURRENT_USER\SOFTWARE\WOW6432Node\Policies\Boldon

James\ConfigManager
You can generally set up relevant entries under any of the supported registry locations. However,
the algorithm expects to find the following as 'pairs' under a sub-tree:
l Label Configuration + Policy
l ServerRootType + ServerFileSystemRoot (if relevant)

Name Type Value

LabelConfiguration REG_SZ The name that was given to the label
configuration in the
Administration Console.
Policy REG_SZ The name that was given to the policy in the
Administration Console.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 180

 Deploying Configuration / Required Registry Entries to Configure Classifier (Minimum Set)

Only required if ServerRootType = 0

The path to the location that holds the
Classifier Configuration folder.
ServerFileSystemRoot REG_SZ
For remote locations, this value should be
specified as a full UNC path, rather than using
Drive letters.
This is only required if the deployment is using
File Store or Active Directory (i.e. this setting is
not required if the deployment is using Web
DWORD Config).
(32-bit)
ServerRootType 0. The configuration is held in File Store
Value (ServerFileSystemRoot key is then
significant).
1. The configuration is held in Active
Directory.

Required Registry Entries to Configure

Classifier (Minimum Set)
The registry entries required by Classifier depend on the desired configuration. Classifier has a
small set of keys which are needed and has a further set of keys to alter/override the normal
behaviour and enable optional features.
The registry entries required to configure Classifier vary depending on the type configuration
store in use, the minimum set of required keys are shown below:
l Active Directory: Defines the users and computers inside the organisation. The database
can be extended to store the Classifier configuration.
l File Store: Any readable file system, network or local where the Classifier software is
running can retrieve the configuration files.
l Web Config: Classifier configuration can be retrieved from a password-protected zip file
stored on a web server or a file store.

Active Directory
Name Type Value
This is only required if the deployment is using File
Store or Active Directory (i.e. this setting is not
ServerRootType REG_ required if the deployment is using Web Config).
DWORD
1 The configuration is held in Active Directory.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 181

 Deploying Configuration / Required Registry Entries to Configure Classifier (Minimum Set)

LabelConfiguration REG_SZ Service Mode Label Configuration Name The

name of the label configuration to use. e.g.
Classifier test.
Policy REG_SZ The name of the Classifier policy to use in the
Label
Configuration.

File Store
Name Type Value
Service Mode Configuration Distribution Server
Type Note: This is only required if the
deployment is using File Store or Active
ServerRootType REG_ Directory (i.e. this setting is not required if the
DWORD deployment is using Web Config). 0 The
configuration is held in File Store
(ServerFileSystemRoot key is then significant).
Service Mode File-Based Configuration
Location Note: Only required if
ServerRootType = 0
The path to the location that holds the
ServerFileSystemRoot REG_SZ Classifier Configuration folder.
For remote locations, this value should be
specified as a full UNC path, rather than using
Drive letters.
LabelConfiguration REG_SZ Service Mode Label Configuration Name
The name of the label configuration to use. e.g.
Classifier test.
Policy REG_SZ The name of the Classifier policy to use in the
Label Configuration.

Web Server
Name Type Value

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 182

 Deploying Configuration / Required Registry Entries to Configure Classifier (Minimum Set)

0. (Default): Disabled. The relevant

applications will retrieve the Master
Configuration according to other
UseWebServer REG_ configuration settings (e.g. File Store).
DWORD 1. Web config will be enabled. The location is
defined by the WebServerConfigFile and
other settings defined in this table.
A valid URL to the file containing the zipped
version of the Master Configuration on your web
server, e.g. http://yourserver/classifier/config.zip
or file://\\localhost\c$\classifier\config.zip
WebServerConfigFile REG_SZ or
file://\\yourserver\sharedfolder\config.zip
WebConfigKey REG_SZ The string returned by Classifier Administration
when the
Web Config is published.
An optional setting only needed in unusually
slow network environments, a DWORD value
which specifies the number of milliseconds
allowed before the web request for Classifier
configuration times out.
WebClientTimeout DWORD
0 (Default): The relevant network default timeout
applies (e.g. 20 seconds).
>0 The number of milliseconds allowed before
the attempt to retrieve the Master Configuration
times out.
LabelConfiguration REG_SZ The name of the label configuration to use. e.g.
Classifier
test.
Policy REG_SZ The name of the Classifier policy to use in the
Label
Configuration.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 183

 Deploying Configuration / Setting the Registry Keys Directly

Additional Considerations
l Spelling Mistakes: Make sure both the name and value of each registry key is spelt
correctly. The Classifier Support Tool can be used to quickly and easily verify this.
l Permissions: Ensure the users have read access to the configuration folder, this can be
checked by navigating to the value from ServerFileSystemRoot or WebServerConfigFile for
file Store and Web Server respectively.
l Competing Registry Locations : If the registry keys appear correct with no spelling mistakes
and users are able to navigate to the configuration another possibility is conflicting keys in
another location. To ensure this is not the case, first remove all Classifier settings and then
manually re-add the required keys to one location.
l Verification : After verifying the registry keys are correct, restart all Office applications. if the
issue has not been resolved then the Classifier add-in may not be installed, the incorrect
version may be installed (32 vs 64-bit) or, the add-in may be disabled. The configuration
cache should be cleared.

Setting the Registry Keys Directly

The screen shot below shows an example (from a 64-bit environment) of the values you need to
establish if you are setting the keys for end users that control access to the Classifier
configuration information under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Boldon
James\ConfigManager.
The values will depend on your local environment and whether you are using Active Directory or
File Store as the Master Configuration location, and whether Classifier Management Agent is
deployed. See description in Label Configuration Registry Settings on page 189 for more
information.
For more detailed information about registry keys and entrie,s see the Classifier Registry Keys
Deployment and Troubleshooting Guide.

NOTE: For Management Agent, OWA Classifier, and SharePoint Classifier,we recommend
that registry entries are established under ServiceMode (see Label Configuration Registry
Settings on page 189).

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 184

 Deploying Configuration / Setting the Registry Keys Directly

Adding Classifier Registry Keys

To add Classifier registry keys:
1. Open Registry Editor.
2. In the Registry Editor, go to HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE>SOFTWARE>Policies>Microsoft .
3. Right-click the registry name and select New>Key .
4. Enter the name you will use, (for example Boldon James).
5. Right-click the registry name and select New>Key .
6. Enter the name ConfigManager.
7. Right-click ConfigManager and select New>Key .
8. Enter the name as LabelConfiguration and the data as Classified.
9. Right-click LabelConfiguration and select New>String Value, and enter Policy.
10. Right-click Policy and select Modify and enter the Value data as Classified.
11. Select Edit>New>String Value, and enter ServerFileSystemRoot.
12. Right-click ServerFileSystemRoot and select Modify. Enter the Value data as \\DC\Config.
13. From Edit, select New>DWORD (32-bit) Value .
14. Enter SystemRootType .

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 185

 Deploying Configuration / Setting the Registry Keys using Group Policy

Setting the Registry Keys using Group

Policy
This assumes that your Group Policy has been extended as described in Applying Supplied
ADM/ADMX/ADML Files on page 187.
The following types of Group Policy settings are provided for Classifier:
l Label Configuration Settings
l Client Configuration Settings
l File Classifier Settings
l Management Agent Settings
The mechanisms are the same for each of the above. The examples below cover the Label
Configuration Registry Settings on page 189 as these are the most likely to be used.
To set the registry keys using Group Policy:
1. Define the settings that are to be common to all users of a PC (i.e. HKEY_Local_Machine).
2. If using Windows Server 2003, from Active Directory Users and Computers, right-click the
domain, select Properties, and select the Group Policy tab.
If using Windows Server 2010, use Group Policy Management Editor MMC to get directly to
the tree.
3. Select the Default Domain Policy entry and click Edit.
4. Select Computer Configuration > Policies > Administrative Template > Classic
Administrative Templates > Boldon James > Label Configuration.
5. Select Configuration Distribution Server Type and choose Properties (2003) or Edit policy
setting (2010).
6. Ensure that the setting is enabled, and choose which method you wish to use (File System
or Active Directory ). Click OK .
7. If you choose File System, define the (shared) location of the configuration files by selecting
File Based Configuration Location > Properties and then entering the network path to the
location (e.g. \\ICS-SVR-1\Classifier Configuration) as per the example below.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 186

 Deploying Configuration / Setting the Registry Keys using Group Policy

10. Select User Configuration > Administrative Template > Classic Administrative Templates >
Boldon James > Label Configuration.
12. Select Label Configuration Name and choose Properties. Ensure that it is enabled and
enter the name of your Configuration (e.g. Classifier test). Click OK .
13. Select Policy Name and choose Properties. Ensure that the setting is enabled and enter the
name of the policy applicable (e.g. All Users). Click OK .
14. If you need to set the Configuration Validity Period, then select Downloaded Configuration
Validity Period and choose Properties.
15. Ensure that it is enabled and enter the required validity period in hours. Setting a value of 0
(zero) will restore default operation so that the Configuration validity is checked each time a
Classifier enabled application starts. Click OK .

Applying Supplied ADM/ADMX/ADML Files

Classifier Administration supplies various ADM and ADMX/ADML files available from the
Classifier Group Policy Templates in the Base Bundle. These can be used to extend the group
policy settings. The steps below provide an example of how to extend Group Policy settings using
the supplied files.
ADM Style Files:
l ClassifierConfig.ADM and ClassifierConfigPerUser.ADM .
l FileClassifierConfig.ADM and FileClassifierConfigPerUser.ADM (only relevant if you are
using File Classifier, but benign if installed and not used).

NOTE:
If when upgrading to a later version of Classifier Administration the settings supported by an
ADM file have been extended, you will have to Remove the old template before adding the
new ADM file. The precise steps will depend on your environment.

To apply supplied ADM/ADMX/ADML files:

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 187

 Deploying Configuration / Setting the Registry Keys using Group Policy

1. Navigate to Computer Configuration.

2. If using Windows Server 2003, go to Active Directory Users and Computers, right-click your
domain and select Properties. Select the Group Policy Tab > Default Domain Policy entry >
Edit.
If using Windows Server 2010, go to Group Policy Management Editor MMC snap-in to get
directly to the target tree. Expand Domains and then expand the domain. Right-click
Default Domain Policy and select Edit.
3. Select Computer Configuration> Policies. Right-click Administrative Templates and select
Add/Remove Templates.
4. Select Add and then browse to the relevant install location (e.g. Program Files\Boldon
James\Classifier Administration ).
5. Select the relevant ADM files and click Open, then Close. The files will be added which will
add new entries below both the Computer Configuration and User Configuration
Administrative Template nodes: ClassifierManagementAgent.admx and
ClassifierManagementAgent.adml.
6. Copy the pair of files from the Classifier Group Policy Templates folder:
l ClassifierManagementAgent.admx to Windows\PolicyDefinitions

l ..\\en-US\ ClassifierManagementAgent.adml to Windows\PolicyDefinitions\en-US

7. Start the Group Policy Management tool.

Once the ADM/ADMX/ADML files have been applied, the various settings can be
configured through the Group Policy Management Editor:
8. Right-click a group policy object and choose Edit.
9. Open the relevant branch in the tree e.g. one of:
l ..\Classic Administration (ADM)\Boldon James\...

l ..\Administrative Templates: Policy definitions..\Boldon James\ Classifier

Management Agent in the screen shot below:

10. Select the relevant sub-tree and configure the settings as required.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 188

 Deploying Configuration / Label Configuration Registry Settings

Registry Keys Set By Group Policy

The following keys (HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE) relate to Configuration location, the Configuration
and Policy.

NOTE:
We recommend that registry entries are established under ServiceMode (see Label
Configuration Registry Settings on page 189) for Management Agent, OWA Classifier,
SharePoint Classifier.
A full description of all the Registry settings relevant only to the Management Agent can be
found in the Management Agent Guide.

The example below shows entries under ...\Policies\Boldon James\ConfigManager. You can
generally set up relevant entries under any of the supported registry locations and the
precedence if entries appear in more than one sub-tree. See Configuration Registry Search
Algorithm on page 177. However, the algorithm expects to find the following as 'pairs' under a
sub-tree:
l Label Configuration + Policy
l ServerRootType + ServerFileSystemRoot (if relevant)

Label Configuration Registry Settings

These registry settings are used to indicate the location from which a Classifier application should
retrieve its Classifier Configuration, the applicable Label Configuration and the Policy that it will
use. The Registry settings are defined below under Registry Settings on page 189 .
Certain Classifier applications are more suited to a Service style of operation and a set of
equivalent keys is defined below under Service Mode Registry Settings on page 193.
Classifier applications use a common precedence algorithm to search for their Registry settings
below HKEY_ LOCAL_MACHINE and HKEY_CURRENT_USER. The locations and the
precedence algorithm are described in Configuration Registry Search Algorithm on page 177.
The settings can be established either directly, or using Group Policy mechanisms as described
in:
l Setting the Registry Keys Directly on page 184
l Setting the Registry Keys using Group Policy on page 186

Registry Settings
The Entries (and Policy setting name ) listed below are established under ...\Boldon
James\ConfigManager. For more detailed information see the Classifier Registry Keys
Deployment and Troubleshooting Guide.

Name Type Value

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 189

 Deploying Configuration / Label Configuration Registry Settings

Normally Classifier client applications (e.g. Email

and Office Classifier) retrieve their configuration
from the designated location (AD or file store)
AND save a copy locally to facilitate offline
operation. In some environments, this can be
inappropriate. This setting can be used to inhibit
ClientServerOverride REG_ the local storage of the configuration. 0 (Default if
DWORD not configured) The standard operation applies
(local storage of the configuration). 1 The
configuration is not stored locally.
CommonConfigFolder This item is only applicable if you are using the
(Configuration Classifier Management Agent and is
download folder) REG_ documented in the Classifier Management Agent
DWORD Guide.
This setting controls configuration download
behaviour for Client mode only. 0 (Default if not
configured) Immediate - if an updated
configuration is detected by a new instance of a
client application, the download completes
before the application proceeds. 1 Deferred - if
an updated configuration is detected by a new
instance of a client application, the application
DeferredConfigDownlo REG_ does not wait for the new configuration download
ad DWORD to complete. Instead, the application proceeds
using the existing configuration and the
configuration download proceeds as a separate
thread.
This setting controls configuration download
behaviour for Client modes. The default is to
LabelConfiguration REG_SZ download server configuration immediately.
Policy REG_SZ The name of the policy in the configuration that
this user should use. E.g. "All users".

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 190

 Deploying Configuration / Label Configuration Registry Settings

File Classifier Policy Name: The name of the

policy in the configuration that this user should
use when running File Classifier. All other
applications will use the value defined by Policy.
The entry, like in PolicyOutlook, will be found in
the same registry key as the Policy entry. It is an
optional setting; if it is not present, then the value
of the Policy entry is used. There are four
options:
l HKEY_
LOCALMACHINE\SOFTWARE\Policies\B
oldon James\ConfigManager
l HKEY_CURRENT_
USER\SOFTWARE\Policies\Boldon
James\ConfigManager
PolicyFileClassifier REG_SZ l HKEY_LOCAL_
MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Boldon
James\ConfigManager
l HKEY_LOCAL MACHINE\SOFTWARE
\WOW6432Node\Boldon
James\ConfigManager (for 32- bit apps on
a 64-bit OS).
This is only required if there is a need for File
Classifier to operate under a different policy to
that used by other classifier applications.
Only required if ServerRootType = 0
The path to the location that holds the Classifier
Configuration folder.
For remote locations, this value should be
ServerFileSystemRoot REG_SZ specified as a full UNC path, rather than using
Drive letters.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 191

 Deploying Configuration / Label Configuration Registry Settings

This is only required if the deployment is using

File Store or Active Directory (i.e. this setting is
not required if the deployment is using Web
Config).

ServerRootType REG_ 0. The configuration is held in File Store

DWORD (ServerFileSystemRoot key is then
significant).
1. The configuration is held in Active
Directory.
This setting also works with UseWebConfig.
ValidityPeriod 0 The centrally held Configuration (held in File
(Downloaded Store or AD) is checked for validity at the start of
Configuration Validity REG_ each session.
Period) DWORD
This is the default assumed if the entry is not set.
> 0 The time in hours for which the local (cache)
copy of the Configuration is assumed to be valid.
No further downloads of the Configuration will be
performed until the ValidityPeriod has expired,
even if the central version is updated. This
setting can be useful for some workstation
environments (e.g. due to the network speed the
time to check the Configuration validity at the
start of each application becomes noticeable and
annoying). It should be used with care as it may
result in users operating with out of date
configurations.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 192

 Deploying Configuration / Label Configuration Registry Settings

Note: This entry is only supported under HKEY_

LOCAL_ MACHINE.
This entry controls whether the Classifier Client
applications (Email and Office Classifier / File
Classifier (3.10 or later)) use Classifier
Management Agent (see Classifier Management
Agent Guide for further details).
0. (Disabled - the default if not configured).
Classifier Client applications will continue
to retrieve configuration directly and will not
register with the Management Agent.
1. (Enabled) Classifier Client applications will
use the Management Agent:
Each Classifier client will obtain its configuration
via the Management agent and not check for a
UseManagementAgent REG_ more recent configuration as described in
DWORD Management Agent Guide > Configuration
update – a single point of contact.
The Email and Office Classifier clients (not File
Classifier) will register with the Management
Agent as part of Client Application Monitoring.

Service Mode Registry Settings

The Keys (and Policy setting name ) listed below are established under ...\Boldon
James\ConfigManager\ServiceMode . If defined these are used by the Management Agent, OWA
Classifier, Classifier Add-in for OWA, SharePoint Classifier, and the Mobile Classifier in
preference to any other settings that may be defined. Use of Service Mode is recommended for
these components. Under ServiceMode, the configuration is retrieved from the designated Master
location - no local cache is maintained. These items are not supported for PerUser policy settings.

Entry \ServerRootType (Service Mode Configuration Distribution Server Type)

Type REG_DWORD
Data 0 Configuration is held in File Store (ServerFileSystemRoot key is then
significant) 1 Configuration is
held in Active Directory

Entry \ServerFileSystemRoot (Service Mode File Based Configuration Location)

Type REG_SZ

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 193

 Deploying Configuration / Label Configuration Registry Settings

Data ( Only required if ServerRootType = 0 )

Path to the location that holds the Classifier Configuration folder

Entry \LabelConfiguration (Service Mode Label Configuration Name)

Type REG_SZ
Data The name of the label configuration to use. e.g. Classifier test. Only
applicable to some applications.

Entry \ Policy (Service Mode Policy Name)

Type REG_SZ
Data The name of the policy in the configuration that this user should use. E.g. "All
users". Only applicable to some applications.

Web Host Settings

The Keys (and Policy setting name) listed below are required if you wish either Classifier Clients
or Classifier Management Agent to retrieve the Master Configuration from a Web location. See
also Configuring Folder Paths on page 34.
For more detailed information about registry keys and entries, see the Classifier Registry Keys
Deployment and Troubleshooting Guide.
Two groups of settings are defined and established under ...\Boldon
James\ConfigManager\ServiceMode for Management Agent use, or under ...\Boldon
James\ConfigManager for Classifier Clients usage. The names presented through the Policy
Manager interfaces differ (e.g. Service Mode Use Web Server for the Management Agent vs Use
Web Server for direct client use).
If the client UseManagementAgent registry entry is set, then any client related settings are
ignored.
If the Management Agent is not in use, then these settings can be used to direct the clients to
retrieve the Master Configuration from the designated web location.

Name Type Value

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 194

 Deploying Configuration / Label Configuration Registry Settings

0. (Default): Disabled. The relevant

applications will retrieve the
Master Configuration according to
other configuration settings (e.g.
File Store).
UseWebServer REG_
1. Web config will be enabled. The
DWORD
location is defined by the
WebServerConfigFile and other
settings defined in this table.
A valid URL to the file containing the
zipped version of the Master
Configuration on your web server, e.g.
http://yourserver/classifier/config.zip
or
file://\\localhost\c$\classifier\config.zip
WebServerConfigFile REG_SZ
or
file://\\yourserver\sharedfolder\config.zip
The string returned by Classifier
Administration when the Web Config is
WebConfigKey REG_SZ published.
An optional setting only needed in
unusually slow network environments, a
DWORD value which specifies the
number of milliseconds allowed before
the web request for Classifier
configuration times out.
WebClientTimeout DWORD 0 (Default): The relevant network default
timeout applies (e.g. 20 seconds).
>0 The number of milliseconds allowed
before the attempt to retrieve the Master
Configuration times out.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 195

 Deploying Configuration / Client Configuration Registry Settings

Determines whether Classifier will

attempt to check for a valid SSL cert
(HTTPS).
0. Ignore errors. Certificate validation
WebServerCertificateValidation DWORD errors on https sites will be
ignored.
1. (Default if not defined) Stop if
errors. The download will fail if
https sites return errors.
LabelConfiguration REG_SZ The name of the label configuration to
use. e.g. Classifier test.
Policy REG_SZ The name of the Classifier policy to use
in the Label Configuration.

Client Configuration Registry Settings

The following Registry settings are available that can be used to control some aspects of
Classifier Client operation (available for Local Machine and Current User). The settings can be
established either directly, or using the Group Policy Option mechanisms as described in:
l Setting the Registry Keys Directly on page 184
l Setting the Registry Keys using Group Policy on page 186
For more information, please see the Classifier Registry Keys Deployment and Troubleshooting
Guide.
Client Configuration keys can be used to override Classifier configuration settings, and can be
defined under:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE / HKEY_CURRENT USER\SOFTWARE\Boldon James\Classifier:

Registry Entries Name Type Description

AllowClassificationHistoryCle REG_ Allow User to clear Classification History
ar DWO
RD 0. The user is not allowed to Clear
Classification History.
1. (default) The user is allowed to clear
Classification History.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 196

 Deploying Configuration / Client Configuration Registry Settings

0. Progress information is not displayed

whilst performing Content Checks.
1. (default) Progress information is
displayed whilst performing Content\
Checks.
REG_
DWO Prior to Classifier 3.14, the progress
DisplayContentCheckProgre RD information was shown throughout the
ss Content Check which could sometimes
cause flickering. From 3.14, the
progress indicator is only shown during
the (possibly lengthy) index building
activity.
(Check high-water mark in embedded Office
documents)
Note: Only applicable when high-water mark
checks are performed.
HWMCheckEmbeddedOffice REG_ 0 (Default): Documents embedded within
Documents DWO Office documents will not be included in high-
RD water mark checks.1 Documents embedded
within Office documents will be included in
high- water mark checks.
(Ignore Password Protected Zip Files)
Note: Only applicable when high-water mark
checks are performed. It overrides any Warn
if file contents cannot be accessed setting.
Not configured - The Warn if file contents
REG_ cannot be accessed setting will take effect.
DWO 0. The Warn if file contents cannot be
IgnorePasswordProtectedZip RD
s accessed setting will take effect.
1. Any failures to access zip files (or files in
zip files) during high-water mark checking are
ignored.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 197

 Deploying Configuration / Client Configuration Registry Settings

1. Outlook Resiliency Keys will be enabled.

0. Outlook Resiliency Keys will be
disabled/inactive.
The SetOutlookResiliency setting creates a
set of Registry keys and values that will
configure Outlook Resiliency for the Classifier
Add-in.
REG_
DWO By default, Outlook will abide by the following
SetOutlookResiliency RD performance checking criterion:
Add-ins should not take an average of more
than 500 ms to start, over 5 successive
occasions.
Outlook will, therefore, disable any Add-in
that is deemed not to fulfil this performance
criterion. To prevent the Email Classifier Add-
In from being disabled in Outlook, Classifier's
SetOutlookResiliency Registry option can be
configured to prevent the Add-in from being
disabled at start-up.
This setting can be configured under either of
the following Registry locations:
HKEY_CURRENT_
USER\SOFTWARE\Boldon James\Classifier
HKEY_LOCAL_
MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Boldon
James\Classifier
If this setting is configured, it will add and
configure the following Registry keys under
the HKEY_CURRENT_
USER\Software\Microsoft\Office\<version>\O
utlook\Resiliency location:
l DoNotDisableAddinList
l NotificationReminderAddinData
For further information about Office
Resiliency see the Classifier Registry
Keys Deployment and Troubleshooting
Guide.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 198

 Deploying Configuration / Settings To Auto Enable Microsoft Office Header / Footer Controls

(Show Notification Messages At Startup)

This can be used to control whether the
Application Test Mode warning dialog (see
Publish Test Configuration ) appears.
Not configured: The default behaviour applies
REG_ and the Application Test Mode warning dialog
DWO appears.
ShowNotificationMessagesAt RD
Startup 0. The Application Test Mode warning dialog
is not shown. You still cannot exit Test Mode
if Classifier applications are active. 1 The
Application Test Mode warning dialog is
shown.

Settings To Auto Enable Microsoft Office

Header / Footer Controls
The following Registry Settings are available that can be used to automatically enable certain
Microsoft Office application settings pertinent to Header / Footer operation (available for Local
Machine and Current User).
These settings can be established directly. The Group Policy templates do not include these
settings.
The settings can be established under: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/HKEY_CURRENT_
USER\SOFTWARE\Boldon James\Classifier.
For more detailed information about registry keys and entries see the Classifier Registry Keys
Deployment and Troubleshooting Guide.
The Registry Keys corresponding to these settings are:

Name Type Value

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 199

 Deploying Configuration / Settings To Auto Enable Microsoft Office Header / Footer Controls

0. (Default)
Feature is
disabled.
1. Auto enables
'Different First
ExcelAutoEnableDifferentFirstPage REG_
Page'
DWORD
header/footer
on the first
worksheet of a
workbook.
2. Auto enables
'Different First
Page'
header/footer
on all
worksheets of
a workbook.
0. (Default)
Feature is
disabled.
1. Auto enables
'Different
ExcelAutoEnableDifferentOddEvenPages REG_
Odd/Even
DWORD
Pages'
header/footer
on the first
worksheet of a
workbook.
2. Auto enables
'Different
Odd/Even
Pages'
header/footer
on all
worksheets of
a workbook.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 200

 Deploying Configuration / Settings To Auto Enable Microsoft Office Header / Footer Controls

0. (Default)
Classifier
footer markings
will be added to
all the slides in
the
presentation.
1. Classifier
markings footer
will be added to
the First slide
only of the
presentation.
2. Classifier
PowerPointSlideMarkings REG_ markings footer
DWORD will be added to
the Title slides
only of the
presentation.
3. Classifier
markings footer
will be added to
all slides
Except the first
slide of the
presentation.
4. Classifier
markings footer
will be added to
all slides
Except title
slides of the
presentation.
5. Classifier
markings footer
will be added to
None of the
slides of the
presentation.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 201

 Deploying Configuration / File Classifier Registry Settings

WordAutoEnableDifferentFirstPage REG_ 0. (Default)

DWORD Feature is
disabled.
1. Auto enables
the 'Different
First Page'
header/footer
setting for first
section of a
document.
2. 2 Auto enables
the 'Different
First Page'
header/footer
setting on all
sections of a
document.
0. (Default)
Feature is
WordAutoEnableDifferentOddEvenPages REG_ disabled.
DWORD
1. Auto enables
the 'Different
Odd/Even
Pages'
header/footer
setting on all
sections of a
document.

File Classifier Registry Settings

These settings (available for Local Machine and Current User) can be used to control aspects of
File Classifier operation.
The settings can be established either directly, or using Group Policy Option mechanisms as
described in:
l Setting the Registry Keys Directly on page 184
l Setting the Registry Keys using Group Policy on page 186
The settings can be established under: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/HKEY_CURRENT_
USER\SOFTWARE\Boldon James\File Classifier.
For more detailed information about registry keys and entries, see the Classifier Registry Keys
Deployment and Troubleshooting Guide.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 202

 Deploying Configuration / File Classifier Registry Settings

The Registry Keys corresponding to these settings are:

Name Type Value

File Classifier Policy Name The name of the policy
in the configuration that this user should use when
running File Classifier. All other applications will
use the value defined by Policy . The entry, like in
PolicyOutlook, will be found in the same registry
key as the Policy entry. It is an optional setting; if it
is not present, then the value of the Policy entry is
used.
There are four options:
PolicyFileClassifier REG_SZ
l HKEY_LOCAL_
MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Policies\Boldon
James\ConfigManager
l HKEY_CURRENT_
USER\SOFTWARE\Policies\Boldon
James\ConfigManager
l HKEY_LOCAL_
MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Boldon
James\ConfigManager
l HKEY_LOCAL_
MACHINE\SOFTWARE\WOW6432Node\B
oldon James\ConfigManager (for 32-bit
apps on a 64-bit OS).
NOTE: Only required if there is a need for
File Classifier to operate under a
different policy to that used by other
classifier applications.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 203

 Deploying Configuration / File Classifier Registry Settings

Not currently supported by

FileClassifierConfig.ADM
When File Classifier is invoked in Windows
Explorer to present Icon Overlays indicating the
label, File Classifier has to open each item to
determine the label, and this can take a noticeable
amount of time if large files are involved.
This EnableFileLabelCaching option can be used
to cause the File Classifier to store a copy of the
label in an Alternate Data Stream (for All file
types) facilitating faster access the next time. File
Classifier will not change the ‘last modified time’
when caching label values. File Classifier will look
for the first instance of the registry key in the
following locations:
l HKCU\SOFTWARE\Policies\Boldon
James\File Classifier
EnableFileLabelCachi REG_ l HKLM\SOFTWARE\Policies\Boldon
ng DWORD James\File Classifier
l HKLM\SOFTWARE\Boldon James\File
Classifier
0 (Default if not defined): File Classifier will not
use an Alternate Data Stream to hold a cache of
the Label for all file types.
Non-zero: File Classifier will cache the label in an
Alternate Data Stream for all file types.
However, in some non-NTFS environments (e.g.
‘NetApp ONTAP’) the action to preserve ‘modified
time’ does not work and all files accessed end up
with a modified time set to the current date/time.
Selectable Files Limit
0. (Default if not defined): An unlimited number
of files are selectable by the user.
1. or > The number of files that may be
SelectableFilesLimit REG_ selected for Classification. If this value is
DWORD exceeded the “Classify” option becomes
disabled.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 204

 Deploying Configuration / Extending the Active Directory Schema

0 (Default): File Classifier attempts to use all the

overlays to reflect the colours associated with the
UseSingleColour REG_ first selector value.
DWORD
1 File Classifier only uses the default icon overlay.

Extending the Active Directory Schema

NOTE:
In order to extend the schema, the user / Administrator needs to have permission to write to
the configuration container and the schema.
For Windows Server 2003, the Window Server 2003 Administration Tools Pack
(ADMINPAK.MSI) must be installed.
The schema extension requires LDIFDE.EXE to be available - this may only be available by
default on a Domain Controller system. LDIFDE.EXE can be made available by using Server
Manager to add either Active Directory Domain Services (ADDS) or Active Directory
Lightweight Directory Services (AD LDS roles).

1. Install the Classifier Schema Extension package from the Classifier Schema Extension
sub-folder of the Classifier Administration in the Base Bundle using either the .msi file or
Setup.exe.
2. From the Start menu locate All Programs / Boldon James / Administration Tools.
NOTE: Extending the schema is a non-reversible operation.

3. Run Classifier Schema Extension.

4. Click Start to update the schema
The tool will update the Active Directory schema and show a confirmation dialog.
5. Click OK. For Windows 2008 systems, ensure that the Active Directory Domain Services
(AD DS)tools are installed, otherwise this will fail with error "Please ensure that the Active
DirectoryDomain Services tools are installed".
6. Click Exit .

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 205

 Deploying Software / Desktop Clients

Deploying Software
Desktop Clients
Email and Office Classifier and Notes Classifier can be deployed via standard MS Group Policy
mechanisms using the appropriate EMailAndOfficeClassifier.MSI or NotesClassifierClient.msi
files. The license (distributed as part of the Configuration) controls the applications to which you
have access.

Classifier Administration
Classifier Administration must be installed on a central (Administrator) server that can be
accessed by the designated administrators via a web browser. Classifier Administration controls
access to features in accordance with the Licenses applied. The license information is distributed
as part of the Configuration and is utilised by client applications to determine which features are
presented to users.

Classifier Clearance Service

The Clearance Service can only operate on a single system at a time (the service should only be
running once in the domain).

NOTE: There is no associated license file for this component - you are granted the rights to use
it through the client license you purchase.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 206

 Label Propagation Mechanisms /

Label Propagation Mechanisms

To support Label Propagation, the various Classifier products need to Read and Set Labels and
Markings on items in a consistent manner.

NOTE: This section describes functionality available in the current version. Classifier product
versions prior to this may support only a subset of features described below. In the text below,
BJ label refers to a custom Classifier property that holds the Label value in an encoded form.
This is usually converted to a Summary Marking if it is to be presented to a user. It is
sometimes referred to as the 'SISL' label. [For Visio documents BJ label is stored as a
'Solution XML Element', rather than a document custom property]

The tables below summarise:

l Document types supported.
l Supported file extensions and Label Locations.
l Application operation. Document Types Supported:
l L: Set the Label on an item of this type. Depending on the item type, the label is stored in an
application custom property, as Meta-data, or a 'standard' property (e.g. ZIP Comment
field). The ability to change a label can be limited by Check for label change rules.
l M : Apply a Marking on an item of this type. A marking held in a Label Location may be used
to determine a label value.
l R: Read the label of an item of this type.
l SPL : Set a SharePoint label (only visible under SharePoint).
l U: For these items, labels under SharePoint cannot be changed.
l ADS: Set a Label value stored in NTFS Alternate Data Stream ( ADS ). Note that this is not
available in all environments (neither OWA attachments nor SharePoint upload). See also
Attachment Handling for further details of high-water mark handling of ADS under Outlook.
l SA (Save as): Document properties containing label information will be stored.

Type Office Email Mail ShareP File Power CAD AP Bo

Classi Classi Attachm oint Classi Classi I x
fier fier ents Classifi fier fier for Classi
(Email, er files fier
(MS OWA &
Office) Notes
Classifie
r)
Word R/L/M - R R/L R/L R/L R/L R
(5)
Excel R/L/M - R R/L R/L R/L R/L R
(5)
PowerP R/L/M - R R/L R/L R/L R/L R
oint

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 207

 Label Propagation Mechanisms /

Visio (4) R/L/M - R (4 - not - - ADS -

OWA)
Project R/L/M - R R/L R/L R/L R/L R
DWG, - - R R R R R/L/M R R
DXF
ZIP - - R R/L R/L R/L R/L R
Messag - R/L/M R R/U R/L R/L R/L R
e (3A)
PDF (6) SA R R/L R/L R/L R/L R
HTML (2) - (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) R
(3)
Open (1) - (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) R
Office
(3)
Media - - R R/L R/L R/L R/L R
(3)
Test/RT - - - SPL ADS ADS R/L
F
Other - - - SPL ADS ADS AD
S

1. (Open Office Documents)

Office applications (for example, Word, Excel) will store private custom properties containing
label information when saving as OpenOffice documents and that Label information is available if
the document is subsequently opened by the same office application. However, this information is
not available to other Classifier applications (e.g. File Classifier or Outlook). By default File
Classifier / Power Classifier stores label information in the ADS (not available to Outlook). A
specific plug-in (3) can be configured that will cause FC/PC to store the label information as a
custom property that can be accessed by that same plug-in meaning it will be accessible to
Outlook (for attachment checks). Label information set by File Classifier / Power Classifier is not
available to Office Classifier. Label information set by whatever mechanism may be meaningless
to Open Office applications.Thus, MS Office applications and File Classifier may manifest
different label values for the same file.
2. (HTML Documents)
Word can save as a web page (HTM/HTML) or a single Web page (MHT/MHTML) both of which
will store private custom properties (e.g. the label) that are recovered if Word subsequently opens
that document. However, this information is not available to other Classifier applications (e.g. File
Classifier or Outlook).
[Word can also save as a filtered Web page (HTM/HTM) which does NOT include the custom
properties - such a document will appear as unlabelled when subsequently opened using Word.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 208

 Label Propagation Mechanisms / Supported File Extensions and Label Locations

Excel can save as HTML, but does not store custom properties so is unlabelled if opened
subsequently.]
By default, File Classifier / Power Classifier stores label information in the ADS (not available to
Outlook). A specific plug-in (3) can be configured that will cause FC/PC to store the label
information as meta-data that can be accessed by that same plug-in meaning it will be accessible
to Outlook (for attachment checks).
Label information set by File Classifier / Power Classifier is not available to Office Classifier. Thus
MS Office applications and File Classifier may manifest different label values for the same file.
3. (3A - Exchange Classifier Only) Support for these requires additional configuration of Classifier
Plugins under guidance from Classifier Customer Support.
4. Visio
Visio must be installed on the platform for this to work (e.g. so not supported under SharePoint).
Visio is launched to access a Visio file, so can incur a significant overhead (e.g. HWM checks in
Outlook).
5. Word and Excel can save documents as other types (e.g. Word to TXT and Excel to CSV).
Such Save actions will typically indicate to the user that some information may be lost. Classifier
labelling and marking information may be lost.
6. Saving as PDF: You can populate various standard document properties ( Title, Author,
Subject and Keywords) that will be propagated if you save an Office document as PDF. However,
Office applications do NOT propagate any Custom Properties to the PDF. In particular the
bjDocumentSecurityLabel is NOT propagated. Email, OWA and Notes Classifier will check
defined Label Locations for recognisable labels in standard PDF file properties for the Check for
the high-water mark and Add an attachment list rules. File Classifier, Power Classifier and the
Classifier API (API is only supplied to support integration with technology partner products) can
set the relevant custom properties of a PDF document.

Supported File Extensions and Label

Locations
Type Supported File Extensions Label May Be Found From
Word doc, dot, docx, docm, dotm, BJ Label custom property, Supported
dotx document label locations.
Excel xls, xlt, xlsx, xlsm, xltm, xltx BJ Label custom property, Supported
document label locations.
PowerPoint ppt, pps, pot, pptx, pptm, BJ Label custom property, Supported
ppsx, ppsm, potx, potm document label locations.
Project mpp, BJ Label custom property, Supported
(2010>) document label locations.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 209

 Label Propagation Mechanisms / Application Operation

Visio (4) vsd, vss, vst, vsdx [vsdx BJ Label custom property, Supported
(2010>) support introduced in document label locations.
Classifier 3.5]
NOTE: Visio must be installed for
labels to be accessible, and Visio
checks are never performed under
OWA for example.

HTML (2,3) html, htm See note 2

Open Office odf, odt, odp See note 1.
(1,3)
PDF PDF BJ Label custom property, Supported
document label locations.
ZIP ZIP Comment field (as might be set using
File or Power Classifier).
Message EML, MSG BJ Label custom property, Supported
(3A) document
Media (3) JPG, JPEG, JPE, JPC, BJ Label custom property (XMP
JPF, JPS, JPX, JP2, J2C, Metadata).
J2K, JFIF, MP4, TIF, TIFF,
WMA
Text / RTF TXT, RTF Alternate Data Stream (as might be set
using File or Power Classifier).
AUTOCAD DWG, DXF BJ Label custom property, Supported
document label locations.
DraftSight
Other Alternate Data Stream (as might be set
using File or Power Classifier).

Application Operation
Application Notes

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 210

 Label Propagation Mechanisms / Application Operation

Office Open:
Classifier
l For the supported document types (see tables above) it uses the
BJ label value if it exists, otherwise it checks configured locations
to determine the current label value.
Save:
l For the supported file extensions (above) it sets the current BJ
label , plus any Markings defined by the configured rules.
l For all other document types (e.g. PDF, RTF, TXT etc.) markings
may be applied (using configured rules) to the document
properties (e.g. Author, Header). These markings may be visible
in the saved item, but there is no separate BJ label available to
other applications. Other Classifier applications (e.g. Email
Classifier) may see the file as unlabelled.
See notes above (1,3) regarding Open Office documents. See
notes above (2,3) regarding HTML documents.
Email Open:
Classifier
l Received messages use the BJ label value if it exists, otherwise
OWA check configured locations to determine the current label value.
Classifier l When performing operations on attachments (not Mobile
Notes Classifier) relating to high-water mark or Attachment list rules:
Classifier l Try to ascertain a label for each item as per 'Label may be found
from' in the table above. Attachment types that are not supported,
Mobile or not configured are treated as unlabelled.
Classifier
Save/Send:
Mail Add-in
l Sets the current BJ label , plus any Markings defined by the
configured rules to message properties when the message is
Saved or Sent.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 211

 Label Propagation Mechanisms / Application Operation

SharePoint Uploading a Classifier labelled file:

Classifier
l Try to ascertain a label for the item as per 'Label may be found
from' in the table above. Attachment types that are not supported,
or not configured are treated as unlabelled.
Uploading an unlabelled file:
l Unlabelled items may be labelled after upload. For Classifier
supported items (excluding Visio and message items) the BJ
label value will be stored, and for Office Classifier supported
items a custom property is set to direct Office Classifier to update
the Markings when the documents is next opened.
l For all other items, any label applied is only associated with the
item whilst it is stored in SharePoint. This value is referred to a
SharePoint label.
File Classifier Read:
Power
l Try to ascertain a label for the item as per 'Label may be found
Classifier
from ' in the table above. Attachment types that are not
supported, or not configured are treated as unlabelled.
Write:
l For documents supported by Office Classifier , write the BJ label
value, and set a custom property to ensure that Office Classifier
will update all Marking locations the next time the file is opened.
NOTE:
Note: Visio is not supported by Power Classifier or File
Classifier.
That from version 3.8 Power Classifier has a Set Update
Markings option which controls this effect as described in the
Power Classifier Guide.

l For PDF write the BJ label custom property .

l For ZIP files overwrite the Comment field.
The Comment is visible if the archive is opened using Winzip.
l MSG files can be labelled using File or Power Classifier.
l For other supported file types write the BJ label custom property.
l All other attachment types optionally write the label to the NTFS
Alternate Stream Data.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 212

 Label Propagation Mechanisms / Application Operation

CAD Open:
Classifier
l For the supported document types (see tables above) it uses the
BJ label value if it exists, otherwise it checks configured locations
( Supported document label locations ) to determine the current
label value.
Save:
l For the supported file extensions (above) it sets the current BJ
label , plus any Markings defined by the configured rules.
Classifier API Read:
(Only l For the supported document types ( dll, zip, pdf, html, jpg, xls,
supplied to xlsx, ppt, pptx, vsd, doc, docx, mpp, odp, ods, odt, msg, pdb, txt,
support xps ) it uses the BJ label value if it exists, otherwise it checks
integration configured locations to determine the current label value.
with
technology Write:
partner l For the supported file extensions (above) it sets the current BJ
products.) label , but no rules (e.g. markings) are applied. See Classifier API
documentation for run-time parameters.
Note: Visio files can only be accessed if Visio is installed AND
there is a significant overhead as Visio will be loaded for each
document accessed.
Box Read:
Classifier
l For the supported document types ( dll, zip, pdf, html, jpg, xls,
xlsx, ppt, pptx, vsd, doc, docx, mpp, odp, ods, odt, msg, pdb, txt,
xps ) it uses the BJ label value if it exists, otherwise it checks
configured locations to determine the current label value.
(Any information held in the Alternate Data Stream is lost when
uploaded.) Write:
l Box Classifier never changes any document.

NOTE: Note: The Open operational above described the general order when trying to find a
label value. This can be reversed by the Check label Locations first setting.

General Limitations
l Any Classifier label assigned to an RMS or S/MIME protected item will only be available
when the item is fully opened by a suitable application, so File / Power Classifier, Email
/OWA / Notes Classifier and SharePoint Classifier does not have access to labels in these

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 213

 Label Propagation Mechanisms / Plugins

circumstances.
l Attempts to Write a label value fail if the file is Read Only, or if the file is in use by another
application.
l Attempts to Read a label may fail if the file is in use by another application.
l Attempts to Read or Write a label fail if you do not have permission to access the file, or the
file is RMS protected or encrypted.
l Attempts to Read or Write a label fail if the file is masquerading - i.e. the content does not
match the file extension (e.g. .TXT renamed as .DOC).

Plugins
Label recognition is performed by a Classifier component that is common across the Classifier
applications. This component utilises information held in an XML file (DocLabeller2) in a Plugins
folder in the configuration:

The file contains a section for each file type supported, defining information such as the file
extensions relevant to the file type, the (Write) properties that Classifier supports and the DLL
used to process that file type:

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 214

 Label Propagation Mechanisms / Plugins

Support for new file types, and extending support for existing file types may require updates to
Classifier software (for example, a new DLL) and / or changes to this XML file.
The initial contents of this XML file are generated when the first Classifier Configuration is
generated and the file is propagated as part of the Classifier Configuration.
The following general sequence should be followed to modify and propagate changes to
DocLabeller2 :
l Ensure any Classifier Client, Administration and Server software changes are applied and
deployed.
l Get the current master configuration using Get Server Configuration . The retrieved
configuration is stored under ...\Boldon James\Configuration as outlined in Configuration
Archives .
l Make the necessary changes to ...\Label Configurations\Plugins\DocLabeller2 .
l Publish the updated Configuration using Publish Configuration .
l The changes will become effective in the applications in due course.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 215

 Example of Best Matching Rule /

Example of Best Matching Rule

The following example illustrates the effects of Rule Overlap Handling where a complex set of
<Label condition> rules have been defined.
Consider a label structure supporting the following three selectors with their associated values:

Designation Department Region

Public Sales Asia
Internal Finance Europe

Now consider a number of instances of the same basic Rule (for example, Outlook FLOT) each
with its own Label match criteria:

Rules Designation Department Region Notes

Rule 1 No Label Will only (and always) match
if no label value is selected.
Rule 2 Always Will only apply if none of the
other rules match the label
condition criteria
Rule 3 <Not Finance Europe
Relevant>
Rule 4 <Any> <Any> Europe
Rule 5 Public Finance <Not
Relevant>
Rule 6 <Any> Finance Europe
Rule 7 Public <Any> Europe
Rule 8 Public Finance Europe

Creating the rules above results in the following rule tree structure:

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 216

 Example of Best Matching Rule /

The rule overlap algorithm operates on the basic premise that the more specific the label
matching criteria, the higher the weighting of the rule (higher weighting wins). Selector ordering is
taken into account (the second selector in the policy has a higher weighting than the first selector
etc.).
The table below shows all the possible values of the selectors defined above, and which rule each
possible combination triggers. Rule 2 is the catch all rule that applies if there is no more specific
match.

<Blank> <Blank> <Blank> Rule 1

<Blank> <Blank> Europe Rule 2

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 217

 Example of Best Matching Rule /

<Blank> <Blank> Asia Rule 2

<Blank> Sales <Blank> Rule 2
<Blank> Sales Europe Rule 2
<Blank> Sales Asia Rule 2
<Blank> Finance <Blank> Rule 2
<Blank> Finance Europe Rule 3
<Blank> Finance Asia Rule 2
Public <Blank> <Blank> Rule 2
Public <Blank> Europe Rule 2
Public <Blank> Asia Rule 2
Public Sales <Blank> Rule 2
Public Sales Europe Rule 7
Public Sales Asia Rule 2
Public Finance <Blank> Rule 5
Public Finance Europe Rule 8
Public Finance Asia Rule 5
Internal <Blank> <Blank> Rule 2
Internal <Blank> Europe Rule 2
Internal <Blank> Asia Rule 2
Internal Sales <Blank> Rule 2
Internal Sales Europe Rule 4
Internal Sales Asia Rule 2
Rule 2

Internal Internal Finance Finance <Blank> Europe Rule 6

Internal Finance Asia Rule 2

Now consider a Label value of “Public; Finance; Europe” – it matches every single rule defined
above with the exception of Rule 1 (No Label) will only match if no label value is selected.
Classifier must pick the ‘ best ’ match. This appears fairly easy because Rule 8 is an exact match
for all three elements. However, if Rule 8 was not defined the answer is less obvious.
So ignoring Rules 1 and 8 in this instance, the algorithm can be summarised as follows:

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 218

 Example of Best Matching Rule /

Any Rule that has a specific match for the Region (most significant selector) is ‘better’ than any
Rule that only has an <Any> or <Not Relevant> or <Always> match for Region. Hence Rules 3, 4,
6 and 7 are immediately ‘better’ matches than Rules 2 and 5 can be ignored in the next
refinement.
Now considering the preceding Selector (Department) in the policy, any rule that specifically
matches the Department value is ‘better’ than a Rule that has only an <Any> or <Not Relevant> or
<Always> match. Hence Rules 3 and 6 are ‘better’ than Rules 4 and 7.
Finally considering the first Selector (Designation) the <Any> is ‘better’ than a <Not Relevant> or
<Always> match which means that Rule 6 is ‘better’ than Rule 3, hence Rule 6 is the ‘best’ match.
If Rule 6 is subsequently deleted, then Rule 3 would be the 'best' match for this example label
value.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 219

 BJTrace Logging Facility /

BJTrace Logging Facility

NOTE: Classifier components log major incidents to the Windows Event Log. The features in
this section are intended only for use under the guidance of Classifier Customer Services.

Office and Email Classifier and Classifier Administration include a Trace Viewer diagnostic tool
that may be used under guidance from Classifier support.
The Boldon James tracing tool allows tracing options to be set for Email and Office Classifier.
BJTrace is installed during the Email and Office Classifier installation procedure. It is also
installed with Classifier Administration and Clearance Service. To run the tool BJTrace is located
at: C:\Program Files\Common Files\Boldon James\Logging\BJTrace.exe. Click the BJTrace.exe
icon to start the application.
Note: There are two versions of the bjlogger (32 and 64-bit). Logging from 32-bit applications may
be displayed in viewer windows in the 64-bit bjtrace, and vice-versa. Whilst this may not in itself
be an issue, it can be confusing because (for example) changes made to the logging settings from
the 64-bit bjtrace environment will have no effect on logging from a 32-bit application seen in a
viewer window in that environment (and vice-versa).
Note: It is important that the size of the memory-mapped file (used to hold logging output) is the
same in both 32 and 64 bit environments. This is the default, and the default size is usually
sufficient. Having different sizes defined in the 32 and 64 bit environments is likely to lead to a
crash if the file is initially created using the smaller size.
Alternatively, the other way round, you may see the following messagebox displayed:
"MapViewOfFile failed: error=5” if you attempt to open a viewer window in bjtrace. The memory
map file size setting is accessed from bjtrace, Tools/options menu item, select the Advanced tab,
and there is a textbox for configuring the shared memory size.
To enable logging of any of the Classifier component products:
1. Run the BJTrace tool.
2. Select File /Application Information, then select the application to be traced.
3. Select Edit Settings .
4. Choose the appropriate application component name and set the logging level and
destination.
5. Click OK and all logging that meets or exceeds the chosen log level will be sent to the
viewer or file as configured.
NOTE: Some environments may not have the necessary permissions to configure
logging levels, and therefore, the administrator may have to logon to establish the
environment for an actual diagnostic session.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 220

 Auditing Event Messages /

Auditing Event Messages

You can enable the Auditing in Global Settings.
The table below summarises the events that may appear depending upon the Audit settings and
the conditions that arise.

NOTE:
Not all events may appear for each application. For example OWA does not support Portion
Marking, so it will never generate event 1125.
Warning entries can be produced either when a rule fires and causes the user to be involved,
or if a rule fires but is configured as Audit only.

Event ID Category values Severity Description

1 Classifier Auditing
2 Classifier Outlook Auditing
3 Classifier Word Auditing
4 Classifier Excel Auditing
5 Classifier PowerPoint Auditing
6 Reclassification Tool Auditing (not used)
7 Recipient clearance check
8 High-water mark check
9 Originator clearance check
10 Label downgrade check
11 Label validity check
12 Label change check
13 Label upgrade check
14 Warning failure override
15 Label auto upgrade
16 Classifier initialised
17 Classifier Project Auditing
18 Classifier Visio Auditing
19 OWA auditing
20 Rule

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 221

 Auditing Event Messages /

21 Policy
22 User Clearance
23 Domain Clearance
24 User Defined Messages
25 Selector Library
26 Marking Format Library
27 Settings
28 Auditor
29 User Clearance
30 Default Label Check
31 User warning check
32 Admin: Marking Library
33 Admin Global Settings
34 Admin: User Message Library
35 Admin: Configuration Settings
36 Admin Policy Selector
37 Admin Policy Rule
38 Admin SMTP Domain Clearance
39 Admin Configuration Transfer
40 Content Inspection Check
41 Admin: Content Library
42 SharePoint Classifier Auditing
43 Admin UI Definitions
44 Maximum Subject length check
45 Minimum Subject length check
46 Recipient type check
47 Recipient count check
48 Message size check
49 Notes Classifier Auditing

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 222

 Auditing Event Messages /

50 S/MIME Auditing
51 RMS Auditing
52 Author label change check
53 Document Author property set
54 Reply to all check
55 Mandatory Selector check
56 Document Content Inspection check
57 Exchange Classifier Auditing
58 File Classifier Auditing
59 Response Recipients check
60 Label Expiration Check
61 Exchange Classifier Administration Auditing
62 Mobile Classifier Auditing
63 McAfee HDLP Check
64 Classifier CAD Auditing
65 Administration of Condition Library
66 Unlabelled attachment check
67 Suggested classification check
68 Box Classifier auditing
69 Admin: Clearance Library
70 SealPath
71 Attachment Clearance Check
72 Seclore Auditing
73 Document RMS Protection Check
Event Definitions
1000 Success Office Classifier initialised in application.
1001 Success Classifier running in Test Mode.
1002 Warning Classifier Configuration not found.
Classifier Licensing

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 223

 Auditing Event Messages /

1005 Error Office Classifier license error.

Emails and Web Emails (Outlook / Categories Applicable

OWA / Notes)
O/L OWA Notes
1101 Success A message has 2 19 49
been sent
1102 Success A message has 2 N/A N/A
been saved
1103 Success A message has 2 N/A N/A
been opened
1104 Success A message has 2 N/A N/A
been closed
1105 Success A message has 2 N/A N/A
been printed
1106 Warning Failed to apply 2 N/A N/A
RMS policy to a
message
1107 Warning Failed to apply 2 19 N/A
Outlook S/MIME
security to a
message
1108 Warning Failed to access 2 19 49
a file (e.g. Check
for high-water
mark)
1109 Warning Originator 9 19 N/A
clearance check
failed
1110 Success Originator 9 19 N/A
clearance check
succeeded (Not
Notes)
1112 Error Recipient 7 19 49
clearance check
failed

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 224

 Auditing Event Messages /

1113 Success Recipient 7 19 49

clearance check
succeeded
1114 Warning Label validation 2 19 49
failed
1115 Success Label validation 2 19 49
succeeded
1116 Error Attachment 8 19 49
check failed
1117 Success Attachment 8 19 49
check succeeded
1118 Warning Upgrade check 13 19 49
failed
1119 Success Upgrade check 13 19 49
succeeded
1120 Warning Downgrade 8 19 49
check failed
1121 Success Downgrade 8 19 49
check succeeded
1123 Warning Change check 12 19 49
failed
1124 Success Change check 12 19 49
succeeded
1125 Success Portion marking 15 N/A N/A
Auto upgrade
succeeded
1126 Warning Warning failure 14 19 49
override
1127 Success An item security 15 N/A N/A
label has been
auto upgraded
due to an
attachment
containing a
higher label than
the Outlook item.

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 225

 Auditing Event Messages /

1128 Success An existing label 2 N/A N/A

value has been
changed using
the Folder View
labelling feature
(this audits the
original label).
1129 Success A label has been 2 N/A N/A
applied using the
Folder View
labelling feature
(this audits the
new label)
1130 Success Default label 30 49 N/A
check succeeded
1131 Warning Default label 30 49 N/A
check failed
1132 Success Warn user check 31 49 N/A
succeeded
1133 Warning Warn user check 31 49 N/A
failed
1134 Success Content 40 N/A N/A
inspection check
succeeded
1135 Warning Content 40 N/A N/A
inspection check
failed
1136 Success SharePoint 42 N/A N/A
Classifier item
added
1137 Success SharePoint 42 N/A N/A
Classifier item
updated
1138 Success SMIME 50 50 N/A
successfully
applied on Send

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 226

 Auditing Event Messages /

1139 Success Maximum 44 44 N/A

Subject length
check succeeded
1140 Warning Maximum 44 44 N/A
Subject length
check failed
1141 Success Minimum Subject 45 44 N/A
length check
succeeded
1142 Warning Minimum Subject 45 44 N/A
length check
failed
1143 Success Recipient type 46 44 N/A
check succeeded
1144 Warning Recipient type 46 44 N/A
check failed
1145 Success Recipient count 47 44 N/A
check succeeded
1146 Warning Recipient count 47 44 N/A
check failed
1147 Success Message size 48 44 N/A
check succeeded
1148 Warning Message size 48 44 N/A
check failed
1149 Warning Message RMS 51 N/A N/A
failed
1150 Success Message RMS 51 N/A N/A
succeeded
1151 Warning Reply to all check 54 54 N/A
failed
1152 Warning Message 55 55 N/A
mandatory
selector check
failed

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 227

 Auditing Event Messages /

1153 Success Message 55 55 N/A

mandatory
selector check
succeeded
1154 Warning Message 59 59 N/A
response
recipients check
Failed
1155 Warning Message label 60 60 N/A
expiration check
Failed
1156 Warning McAfee check 63 N/A N/A
failed
1157 Success McAfee check 63 N/A N/A
succeeded
1158 Error Unlabelled 66 N/A N/A
attachment check
failed
1159 Warning Unlabelled 66 N/A N/A
attachment check
passed
1160 Success Message 67 N/A N/A
Suggested
classification
nothing to apply
1161 Success Message 67 N/A N/A
Suggested
classification
applied
automatically
1162 Warning Message 67 N/A N/A
Suggested
classification
calculated
1163 Success Message 67 N/A N/A
Suggested
classification
applied manually

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 228

 Auditing Event Messages /

1164 Warning Message 67 N/A N/A

Suggested
classification
failed to calculate
1165 Warning Sealpath 70 N/A N/A
protection failed
to apply
1166 Success Sealpath 70 N/A N/A
protection
successfully
applied
1167 Error Attachment 71 N/A N/A
clearance check
failed
1168 Success Attachment 71 N/A N/A
clearance check
2000 Info Used for 2000 Info Used for
Warning unexpected Warning unexpected
conditions often conditions
Error related to Error often related
limitations. The to limitations.
text logged The text
describes the logged
condition). describes the
condition).
File Classifier Categories
Applicable
2100 Success File Classifier 58
Labelled
Documents (Excel, PowerPoint, Categories
Project, Visio and Word and CAD) Applicable
(E,P, P, V,W,C)
3000 Success A document has 4,5,17,18,3,64
been saved
3001 Success A document has 4,5,17,18,3,64
been opened
3002 Success A document has 4,5,17,18,3,64
been closed

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 229

 Auditing Event Messages /

3003 Success A document has 4,5,17,18,3,64

been printed
3004 Warning Document label 11
validation has
failed
3005 Success Document label 11
validation has
succeeded
3006 Warning Document Not used
upgrade check
failed
3007 Success Document Not used
upgrade check
succeeded
3008 Warning Document Not used
downgrade check
failed
3009 Success Document Not used
downgrade check
succeeded
3010 Warning Document 12
change check
failed
3011 Success Document 12
change check
succeeded
3012 Warning Document 14
warning failure
override
3013 Success Default label 30
check succeeded
3014 Warning Default label 30
check failed
3015 Success Warn user check 31
succeeded
3016 Warning Warn user check 31
failed

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 230

 Auditing Event Messages /

3017 Warning Document RMS 51

failed
3018 Success Document RMS 51
succeeded
3019 Warning Document Author 52
change check
failed
3020 Success Document Author 52
change check
succeeded
3021 Success Document Author 53
property set
3022 Warning Document 55
mandatory
selector check
failed
3023 Success Document 55
mandatory
selector check
succeeded
3024 Success Document 56
content
inspection
succeeded
3025 Warning Document 56
content
inspection failed
3026 Warning Document label 60
expiration check
failed
3030 Success Document 67
Suggested
classification
nothing to apply

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 231

 Auditing Event Messages /

3031 Success Document 67

Suggested
classification
applied
automatically
3032 Warning Document 67
Suggested
classification
calculated
3033 Success Document 67
Suggested
classification
applied manually
3034 Warning Document 67
Suggested
classification
failed to calculate
3035 Warning Document 70
Sealpath
protection failed
to apply (not
currently used)
3036 Success Document 70
Sealpath
protection
successfully
applied (not
currently used)
Exchange Classifier Administration Categories
Applicable
4000 Warning Item checks 57
failed
Classifier Administration Categories
Applicable
5007 Success Successfully 28
retrieved label
configuration
from server

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 232

 Auditing Event Messages /

5008 Success Successfully 28

published label
configuration
5009 Error Failed to publish 28
label
configuration
5010 Success Clearance default 22
value changed
5011 Success Settings changed 27
5012 Success User defined Not used
message added
5013 Success All audit settings Not used
enabled
5014 Success Audit settings 24
changed
5015 Success User defined 23
message has
been saved
5016 Success Save SMTP 22
template
5017 Success Save clearance Not used
template
5018 Success Saved new 26
marking format
5019 Success Copied marking 26
format
5020 Success Copied policy 21
5021 Success Deleted policy 21
5022 Success Edited policy Not used
5023 Success Added new policy 21
5024 Success Added new label Not used
format

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 233

 Auditing Event Messages /

5025 Success Added new Not used

labelling
configuration
based on
template
5026 Success Selector library 25
changed
5027 Success Marking format 26
changed
5028 Success Policy control 21
library changed
5029 Success Rule changed 20
5030 Success Delete Label 28
Configuration
5031 Success Rename Label 28
configuration
5032 Success Selector 25
operation
5033 Success Configuration 33,35
settings changed
5034 Success Content library 41
changed
5035 Success Classifier 28
Administration
initialised
5036 Success Classifier 28
Administration
closing
5037 Success UI definitions 43
changed
5038 Success Delete Marking 26
Format
5039 Success Condition Library 65
changed
5040 Success Save Clearance 69
library template

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 234

 Auditing Event Messages /

Active Directory Clearance Categories

Applicable
6000 Success User Clearance 29
successfully
updated
Box Classifier Categories
Applicable
7000 Success Box label added 68
7001 Success Box label 68
updated
7002 Success Box item deleted 68
7003 Success Box item 68
quarantined
7004 Success Box item 68
released
7005 Warning Box item release 68
failure
7006 Warning Box item 68
quarantine failure
7007 Warning Box item delete 68
failure
7008 Warning Box label change 68
failure
SharePoint Classifier (3.10 or later) Categories
Applicable
8000 Success SharePoint 42
Classifier
document library
changed
8001 Error SharePoint 42
Classifier
document library
change fail
8002 Success SharePoint 42
Classifier client
files installation

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 235

 Auditing Event Messages /

8003 Error SharePoint 42

Classifier client
files installation
fail
8004 Success SharePoint 42
Classifier item
change
8005 Error SharePoint 42
Classifier item
change fail
8006 Success SharePoint 42
Classifier apply
default label
8007 Error SharePoint 42
Classifier apply
default label fail
8008 Success SharePoint 42
Classifier
insufficient
permissions
8009 Error SharePoint 42
Classifier
insufficient
permissions fail
8010 Success SharePoint 42
Classifier
quarantine list
move
8011 Error SharePoint 42
Classifier
quarantine list
move fail
8012 Success SharePoint 42
Classifier
quarantine list
restore

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 236

 Auditing Event Messages /

8013 Error SharePoint 42

Classifier
quarantine list
restore fail
8014 Success SharePoint 42
Classifier
quarantine
permissions
modified
8015 Error SharePoint 42
Classifier
quarantine
permissions
modified fail
8016 Success SharePoint 42
Classifier
quarantine
permissions
restored
8017 Error SharePoint 42
Classifier
quarantine
permissions
restored fail

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 237

 Supported Content Checking File Types /

Supported Content Checking File

Types
The following file types are recognised and processed by the Email Classifier Content Checking.
l Adobe Acrobat (*.pdf)
l Adobe Framemaker MIF (*.mif)
l Ami Pro (*.sam)
l Ansi Text (*.txt)
l ASCII Text
l ASF media files (metadata only) (*.asf)
l CSV (Comma-separated values) (*.csv)
l DBF (*.dbf)
l EBCDIC
l EML files (emails saved by Outlook Express) (*.eml)
l Enhanced Metafile Format (*.emf)
l Eudora MBX message files (*.mbx)
l Flash (*.swf)
l GZIP (*.gz)
l HTML (*.htm, *.html)
l JPEG (*.jpg)
l Lotus 1-2-3 (*.123, *.wk?)
l MBOX email archives (including Thunderbird) (*.mbx)
l MHT archives (HTML archives saved by Internet Explorer) (*.mht)
l MIME messages
l MSG files (emails saved by Outlook) (*.msg)
l Microsoft Access MDB files (*.mdb, *.accdb, including Access 2007 and Access 2010)
l Microsoft Document Imaging (*.mdi)
l Microsoft Excel (*.xls), EXCEL 2003 XML (*.xml), EXCEL 2007 and 2010 (*.xlsx)
l Microsoft Outlook data files (*.PST) (added in version 7.67)
l Microsoft Outlook/Exchange Messages, Notes, Contacts, Appointments, and Tasks (See
note 2)
l Microsoft Outlook Express 5 and 6 (*.dbx) message stores
l Microsoft PowerPoint (*.ppt), PowerPoint 2007 and 2010 (*.pptx)
l Microsoft Rich Text Format (*.rtf)
l Microsoft Searchable Tiff (*.tiff)
l Microsoft Word for DOS (*.doc), Word for Windows (*.doc), Word 2003 XML (*.xml), Word
2007 and 2010 (*.docx)
l Microsoft Works (*.wks)
l MP3 (metadata only) (*.mp3)

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 238

 Supported Content Checking File Types /

l Multimate Advantage II (*.dox)

l Multimate version 4 (*.doc)
l OpenOffice versions 1, 2, and 3 documents, spreadsheets, and presentations (*.sxc, *.sxd,
*.sxi, *.sxw,
*.sxg, *.stc, *.sti, *.stw, *.stm, *.odt, *.ott, *.odg, *.otg, *.odp, *.otp, *.ods, *.ots, *.odf)
(includes OASIS Open Document Format for Office Applications)
l Quattro Pro (*.wb1, *.wb2, *.wb3, *.qpw)
l QuickTime (*.mov, *.m4a, *.m4v)
l RAR (*.rar) (See note 4)
l TAR (*.tar)
l TIFF (*.tif)
l TNEF (winmail.dat files)
l Treepad HJT files (*.hjt)
l Unicode (UCS16, Mac or Windows byte order, or UTF-8)
l Visio XML files (*.vdx)
l Windows Metafile Format (*.wmf)
l WMA media files (metadata only) (*.wma)
l WMV video files (metadata only) (*.wmv)
l WordPerfect 4.2 (*.wpd, *.wpf). WordPerfect (5.0 and later) (*.wpd, *.wpf)
l WordStar version 1, 2, 3 (*.ws), WordStar versions 4, 5, 6 (*.ws), WordStar 2000
l Write (*.wri)
l XBase (including FoxPro, dBase, and other XBase-compatible formats) (*.dbf)
l XML (*.xml), XML Paper Specification (*.xps)
l XSL
l XyWrite
l ZIP (*.zip)

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 239

 Mapping Address Book to AD Attribute /

Mapping Address Book to AD

Attribute
The following table shows the mapping of Address Book properties to AD attributes used by
Classifier.

Address Book Property A/D User Attribute

Account SamAccountName
City City
Common Name CN
Company Company
Country/Region Country
Department Department
Description Description
Display Name DisplayName
Email Address legacyExchangeDN
Extension attribute n (n = 1 to 15 ) extensionAttribute n (n = 1 to 15)
Fax number facsimileTelephoneNumber
Given Name GivenName
Home telephone number HomePhone
Initials Initials
Mobile telephone number Mobile
Office physicalDeliveryOfficeName
Pager number Pager
Printable display name displayNamePrintable
Proxy address ProxyAddresses
SMTP address mail
State/Province St
Street StreetAddress
Surname Sn

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 240

 Mapping Address Book to AD Attribute /

Telephone notes info

Telephone number telephoneNumber
Title title
URL url
User culture msEXCHuserCulture
Zip/Postal Code PostalCode

User Guide www.helpsystems.com page: 241